INGLES 2 MEDIO JO - Textos Escolares
INGLES 2 MEDIO JO - Textos Escolares
INGLES 2 MEDIO JO - Textos Escolares
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
TEXTO PARA EL ESTUDIANTE<br />
Jolanta Polk Reyes<br />
EDICIÓN ESPECIAL PARA EL<br />
MINISTERIO DE EDUCACIÓN<br />
PROHIBIDA SU COMERCIALIZACIÓN<br />
AÑO 2011
Name:<br />
School:<br />
Teacher:<br />
Year:
Ediciones Cal y Canto<br />
© English 2º Medio<br />
2010<br />
Original text Jolanta Polk<br />
Teaching English as a Foreign Language,<br />
Dublin, Irlanda.<br />
Teacher training, translation and English Literature,<br />
University of Silesia, Poland.<br />
Original illustrations © Ediciones Cal y Canto<br />
Design © Ediciones Cal y Canto<br />
Nº de Inscripción: 180.758<br />
ISBN: 978-956-8623-65-4<br />
General Publisher Jorge Muñoz Rau.<br />
Publisher Alicia Manonellas Balladares.<br />
Assistant Publisher Gloria Caro Opazo.<br />
Ly-Sen Lam Díaz.<br />
Designed by María Jesús Moreno Guldman.<br />
Cover designed by María Jesús Moreno Guldman.<br />
Layout by Rodolfo Acosta Castillo.<br />
Juvenal SepúlvedaAravena.<br />
Proofreading Thomas Connelly.<br />
Illustrations Venus Astudillo.<br />
General Production Cecilia Muñoz Rau.<br />
Production Assistant Lorena Briceño González.<br />
Recording Producer Rodrigo González Díaz.<br />
Photos Banco de Fotos Ediciones Cal y Canto .<br />
All rights reserved; no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system,<br />
transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or<br />
otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher.<br />
La materialidad y fabricación de este texto está certificado por el IDIEM - Universidad de Chile.<br />
Impreso RR Donnelley<br />
®<br />
Se terminó de imprimir 255.124 ejemplares en el mes de enero de 2010.<br />
®<br />
®<br />
®
TEXTO PARA EL ESTUDIANTE<br />
Jolanta Polk Reyes<br />
Teaching English as a Foreign Language, Dublin, Ireland.<br />
Teacher training, translation and English Literature, University of Silesia, Poland.
SET UP<br />
Some interesting pictures to provide a setting and some simple exercises to activate your previous<br />
knowledge. You can also examine the objectives of the unit here.<br />
READING<br />
The tasks will help you to develop strategies to improve<br />
your understanding of written texts.<br />
4<br />
LISTENING<br />
The tasks will help you to develop strategies to improve<br />
your understanding of spoken messages.
APPLY YOUR KNOWLEDGE<br />
These attractive and entertaining activities will motivate you to study and put into<br />
practice what you are learning.<br />
CHECK AND CORRECT<br />
A formal test at the end of the unit to evaluate your progress and help you to<br />
discover what you need to revise.<br />
FINAL CHECK<br />
Guided analysis of your strengths and<br />
weaknesses, to help you to check your<br />
progress and find ways to improve.<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Section designed to help you revise<br />
or discover a particular grammar<br />
structure. The activities are meant to<br />
promote independent learning.<br />
PLAY IT<br />
Section designed to motivate you<br />
with various entertaining games.<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
These short evaluation activities<br />
allow you to analyse your<br />
performance. You complete the<br />
tasks within a time limit and check<br />
your points.<br />
Mind<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
Interesting bits of information<br />
on the topics of the lesson.<br />
T ea s er<br />
In this section you will find<br />
interesting stories and funny<br />
illustrations, connected with<br />
the topic of the unit.<br />
Danger<br />
This section will help you to<br />
be aware of the most<br />
common grammar errors.<br />
You can find additional<br />
information at the web<br />
site(s) suggested.<br />
5
6<br />
1<br />
NAME COMMUNICATION AND<br />
UNDERSTANDING<br />
PAGES 8 - 39<br />
Reading<br />
We Are Happy To Announce . . 10<br />
Decoding Writing . . . . . . . . . . 22<br />
Two Announcements . . . . . . . 36<br />
Listening<br />
Am I Getting Through To You?. . 16<br />
Visible Body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28<br />
The Morse Code . . . . . . . . . . . . 37<br />
Speaking<br />
To participate in a guided oral<br />
text imitating a model . . . . . . 14<br />
To consolidate key<br />
expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19<br />
To talk about topics expressing<br />
their own ideas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26<br />
To imitate a model<br />
conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32<br />
To imitate a model<br />
conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38<br />
Writing<br />
To rewrite a passage using<br />
linking words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15<br />
To write a short text<br />
consolidating language<br />
learnt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21<br />
To write a short report . . . . . . 27<br />
To write a short paragraph . . 33<br />
To rewrite a passage<br />
using linking words . . . . . . . . . 39<br />
2<br />
NAME HOW STRANGE!<br />
HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
PAGES 40 - 71<br />
Reading<br />
Welcome To New Zealand . . . 42<br />
Twister, Twister. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54<br />
San Pedro De Atacama . . . . . . 68<br />
Listening<br />
The Strange Things We Do . . 48<br />
Eyewitness Reports . . . . . . . . . 60<br />
The Weather Report . . . . . . . . 69<br />
Speaking<br />
To talk about celebrating<br />
an anniversary.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46<br />
To express possibility. . . . . . . . 51<br />
To complete a conversation<br />
and talk about it . . . . . . . . . . . . 59<br />
To complete a conversation<br />
and talk about it . . . . . . . . . . . . 64<br />
To express opinions<br />
about some pictures . . . . . . . . 71<br />
Writing<br />
To write suggestions<br />
to organise a party . . . . . . . . . . 47<br />
To write a short paragraph<br />
to express opinions. . . . . . . . . . 51<br />
To write about a natural<br />
phenomenon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58<br />
To write sentences about<br />
measure instruments. . . . . . . . 65<br />
To write a short<br />
weather report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70<br />
3<br />
NAME WE ARE WHAT<br />
WE EAT<br />
PAGES 72 - 103<br />
Reading<br />
Staying Healthy -<br />
Keeping Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74<br />
Eating Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86<br />
Eating Out The<br />
Japanese Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100<br />
Listening<br />
Edible Art . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80<br />
Let's Do It All Together . . . . . . 92<br />
What A Chef Has To Say . . . 101<br />
Speaking<br />
To talk about food<br />
preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76<br />
To participate in a dialogue<br />
with a food artist. . . . . . . . . . . . 83<br />
To talk about a restaurant . . . 90<br />
To complete a conversation<br />
using visual clues . . . . . . . . . . . 96<br />
To complete and role-play a<br />
conversation about food . . . 103<br />
Writing<br />
To complete a recipe . . . . . . . 78<br />
To write a description<br />
of a picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84<br />
To write a short restaurant<br />
review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91<br />
To write sentences using<br />
visual clues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97<br />
To write a set of questions<br />
about a recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4<br />
NAME WHATEVER YOU DO<br />
OR MAKE - DO IT<br />
AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
PAGES 104 - 135<br />
Reading<br />
Do It Well! Make It Big! . . . . . 106<br />
Holding The World On<br />
Your Shoulders . . . . . . . . . . . . 118<br />
Making Curanto . . . . . . . . . . . 132<br />
Listening<br />
Follow The Instructions . . . . 112<br />
I'd Like To Apply!. . . . . . . . . . . 124<br />
How To Use It . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134<br />
Speaking<br />
To express plans for the future. 110<br />
To express plans for the future. 116<br />
To talk about wishes<br />
and regrets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122<br />
To talk about wishes . . . . . . . 127<br />
To express distances<br />
and duration of events. . . . . 135<br />
Writing<br />
To write the end of a story<br />
using visual clues . . . . . . . . . . 111<br />
To write a set of instructions<br />
for using a gadget . . . . . . . . . 117<br />
To write sentences expressing<br />
wishes and desires. . . . . . . . . 123<br />
To write a letter requesting<br />
information for a job. . . . . . . 129<br />
To write a paragraph expressing<br />
hopes and desires . . . . . . . . . 135<br />
NAME LIFE AS WE<br />
KNOW IT<br />
PAGES 136 - 167<br />
BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200<br />
5<br />
Reading<br />
Alternative Lifestyles. . . . . . . 138<br />
Life As We Knew It . . . . . . . . . 150<br />
Up For A Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 164<br />
Listening<br />
I Would Like To Dedicate<br />
This Song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144<br />
Life As It Will Be . . . . . . . . . . . 156<br />
Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165<br />
Speaking<br />
To participate in a conversation<br />
expressing opinions . . . . . . . 142<br />
To participate in a conversation<br />
using visual clues . . . . . . . . . . 147<br />
To express what people need,<br />
wish or want to . . . . . . . . . . . 155<br />
To express ideas about<br />
protecting the planet . . . . . . 161<br />
To participate in dialogues<br />
according to visual clues . . . 166<br />
Writing<br />
To write a paragraph about<br />
someone's lifestyle . . . . . . . . 143<br />
To write a note of apology . . 149<br />
To write a set of suggestions<br />
to visit a place . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155<br />
To write a list of everyday<br />
activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161<br />
To write a paragraph expressing<br />
needs and obligations . . . . . 167<br />
6<br />
NAME TRADITIONS,<br />
TRADITIONS<br />
PAGES 168 - 199<br />
Reading<br />
Let's Celebrate . . . . . . . . . . . . 170<br />
Living With Traditions . . . . . 182<br />
On The First Day Of<br />
Christmas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196<br />
Listening<br />
Proud To Be . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176<br />
Changing Language . . . . . . . 188<br />
The Right Clothes. . . . . . . . . . 197<br />
Speaking<br />
To talk about duration<br />
of events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175<br />
To talk about life<br />
experiences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180<br />
To express feelings . . . . . . . . 185<br />
To talk about predictions<br />
for the future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192<br />
To express surprise,<br />
sympathy or joy . . . . . . . . . . . 198<br />
Writing<br />
To write a paragraph about<br />
a familiar celebration . . . . . . 175<br />
To write a short paragraph<br />
about a tradition. . . . . . . . . . . 181<br />
To rewrite questions<br />
in direct speech. . . . . . . . . . . . 187<br />
To write a list of predictions<br />
for Chile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193<br />
To write descriptions<br />
of pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199<br />
7
8<br />
IN THIS UNIT YOU WILL LEARN TO:<br />
Reading: Find specific information through scanning /<br />
Discriminate between correct and incorrect information<br />
Listening: Identify types of text / Find specific information /<br />
Identify speaker<br />
Production: Express emotions such as interest, surprise,<br />
sympathy and pleasure / Say why things happen<br />
Functions: Express interest, surprise, sympathy and pleasure /<br />
Express feelings / Give reasons<br />
YOU WILL USE THE FOLLOWING TEXT TYPES:<br />
Reading: Announcements / Reports<br />
Listening: A rap / A poem / A radio programme<br />
YOU WILL ALSO LEARN:<br />
Grammar: The Present Continuous tense / Linking words<br />
Vocabulary: Words related to communication and understanding<br />
YOU WILL PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THESE VALUES:<br />
The importance of communication and respect for other people's<br />
opinions and reasons
SET UP<br />
1<br />
A communication channel is the means we use to send information from one<br />
person to another. What are the communication channels in the pictures?<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
2 Look at the illustration below with your partner and answer these questions.<br />
a. Why can they not understand each other?<br />
b. What languages are they speaking?<br />
c. What can they do to communicate?<br />
?<br />
What’s your name?<br />
3 What do these symbols mean? When do we use symbols to communicate?<br />
a. @ b. & c. $ d. € e. % f. ®<br />
You can find more signs and symbols at http://www.guide-to-symbols.com<br />
Mind<br />
T ea s er<br />
Why do we communicate?<br />
People communicate with<br />
each other for many reasons.<br />
These are some of them.<br />
- They want to spread news.<br />
- They want to warn of<br />
dangers.<br />
- They want to pass on<br />
information.<br />
- They want to ask for help.<br />
- They want to express<br />
feelings.<br />
9
10<br />
WE ARE HAPPY TO ANNOUNCE…<br />
READING<br />
Danger<br />
Why - Because<br />
Pay attention to these<br />
examples:<br />
Why do people need to<br />
eat? Because they need<br />
energy for their bodies.<br />
Why are you reading this<br />
book? Because it is<br />
interesting.<br />
Notice that we always use<br />
why to ask for the reason /<br />
purpose of an action and<br />
because to give the reason /<br />
purpose of an action.<br />
Why is the equivalent of<br />
Spanish por qué and<br />
because is the equivalent of<br />
Spanish porque.<br />
UNIT 1<br />
1 What is the purpose of each of the texts below?<br />
a. The purpose of text ___________ is to announce a change of address.<br />
b. The purpose of text ___________ is to announce a job opening.<br />
c. The purpose of text ___________ is to offer a service.<br />
2<br />
3<br />
1<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Katie Price<br />
2<br />
1 Stitch in time saves 9<br />
Clothes repairs<br />
24 hour service<br />
1stitch@yahoo.co.uk<br />
NEEDED<br />
SHORT ORDER CHEF<br />
FOR A BUSY MID-TOWN<br />
CHINESE RESTAURANT<br />
CALL MR. WONG AT<br />
0756 6789678<br />
FOR MORE DETAILS<br />
Which of these actions do you need to take to contact the person or<br />
company making the announcements above?<br />
a. I need to send an e-mail.<br />
b. I need to go to the place.<br />
c. I need to phone.<br />
Which of the words in the box would you expect to find in a text<br />
announcing the winner of a competition?<br />
3<br />
Lesson 1<br />
Dear customers<br />
On 13 March,<br />
the company<br />
moved from 13,<br />
Gainsborough<br />
Road to 245<br />
Trafalgar<br />
Street.<br />
We hope to<br />
see you there.<br />
Management<br />
ITCI Centre<br />
· award · contestant · introduce · judges<br />
· meet · place · present · prize · result · runner up<br />
N<br />
Gainsborough<br />
Trafalgar<br />
245
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Have a quick look at the text. Why are some parts of it highlighted in bold<br />
or written in a different colour?<br />
a. They are announcing the winners of the competition.<br />
b. They are the only important parts.<br />
c. They are more important than other parts.<br />
Scan the text. What symbols can you find? List them in your notebook.<br />
What do they mean?<br />
Copy this diagram in your notebook. Scan the text again and complete<br />
the diagram with the corresponding information.<br />
Runner up 1<br />
Title of Competition<br />
Winner<br />
Judge 1 Judge 2<br />
Runner up 2<br />
Read the announcement more in detail and write the corresponding<br />
name, Roland, Imelda or Jo.<br />
a. ___________ is a bus driver.<br />
b. ___________ wrote The Wire Road.<br />
c. ___________ is a housewife.<br />
d. ___________ receives a laptop.<br />
e. ___________ likes jazz.<br />
8 Choose the best option to complete each statement.<br />
a. When the text says that Roland is on call day or night it means that<br />
i. he can expect to be called to the hospital at any time.<br />
ii. he keeps calling the hospital all the time, day or night.<br />
b. Runner up prizes in this text are<br />
i. consolation prizes.<br />
ii. second and third prizes.<br />
c. The Last Dance was short-listed for an award, which means it was<br />
i. the winner of the award.<br />
ii. one of the best books.<br />
9 Find sentences in the text that mean the same as the following.<br />
a. He lives in Edinburgh.<br />
b. Roland isn't interested in becoming a professional writer.<br />
c. The William Trevor is a competition organised every year.<br />
d. Roland is a doctor who looks after children.<br />
Find more false friends at:<br />
http://www.saberingles.com.ar/curious/falsefriends.html<br />
Danger<br />
Cognates help you<br />
understand a text. But watch<br />
out for false cognates or<br />
false friends. They can make<br />
a text more confusing<br />
because they are pairs of<br />
words in two languages that<br />
look and / or sound similar,<br />
but have different meanings.<br />
Examples:<br />
Spanish arena = sand (not<br />
arena, which is a sort of<br />
stadium).<br />
English balloon = globo (not<br />
balón)<br />
English introduce = presentar<br />
a alguien (not present a<br />
paper or a report).<br />
English competition =<br />
competencia (not<br />
competence = skills/abilities).<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
11
12<br />
UNIT 1<br />
ANNOUNCEMENT<br />
The organising committee of the 2008<br />
William Trevor Short Story<br />
Competition is pleased to announce the<br />
result of this year's contest. And<br />
although we received more than 1,000<br />
entries we chose just three as the<br />
winning stories.<br />
Introducing The Winner<br />
The winner, Roland Brand, besides the<br />
County Council Library & Arts Services<br />
prize of €1,000 gets a laptop computer<br />
contributed by PC Factory. The title of<br />
the winning entry is The Wire Road.<br />
About the Author<br />
When not occupied with his writing,<br />
Roland Brand is busy working in a<br />
children's hospital. Roland is a<br />
paediatrician and needs to be on call<br />
day and night. Roland‘s working<br />
hours are long and the work is intense<br />
but he still likes to dedicate time to his<br />
passion: writing.<br />
Roland doesn't want to become a<br />
professional writer - he is happy with<br />
his career. But why does he write? He<br />
The organising committee is also<br />
pleased to announce the next<br />
International Short Story Competition<br />
to take place in 2012. If you need more<br />
details access our new website<br />
www.mitchelstownshortstoryprize.com<br />
from 1st May 2009. Send your entries to<br />
shortstory@mitchelstown.com<br />
thinks that writing is a way of looking<br />
after the creative side of his personality.<br />
Introducing Runner up Prize Winners<br />
Runner up prizes of €150 each and €50<br />
book vouchers are awarded to the<br />
following contestants:<br />
Jo Campbell, London.<br />
Although by profession Jo is a school<br />
bus driver, her other interests include<br />
painting, walking her dog and reading<br />
romantic fiction. She doesn't like<br />
watching television because she thinks<br />
it is a waste of time. What does she<br />
prefer? She prefers to spend her time<br />
writing!<br />
Imelda Carroll, Bridgetown<br />
Imelda is a housewife who, besides<br />
short stories and poetry, loves winter<br />
sports, learning about exotic countries<br />
and jazz.<br />
The William Trevor Competition is a<br />
contest which attracts more than 1,000<br />
entries each year. Judges Debby Mayne<br />
and J.A. Konrad helped to select the<br />
best stories. Ms Mayne is a published<br />
author of five works of fiction including<br />
The Last Dance - a book short-listed for<br />
the National Children's Award. She<br />
lives in Cambridge with her husband.<br />
Mr Konrad is the editor of the magazine<br />
True Stories and he resides in<br />
Edinburgh. He is also the author of a<br />
poetry collection entitled First Light.<br />
Source: Adapted from Reader's Digest and from the original<br />
William Trevor Short Story Competition announcement, 2007.
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Linking words<br />
1. Read these sentences from the text and notice how we link sentences<br />
in English.<br />
a. Roland is a paediatrician and needs to be on call day and night.<br />
b. Although by profession Jo is a school bus driver, her other interests<br />
include painting, walking her dog and reading romantic fiction.<br />
c. She doesn't like watching television because she thinks it is a waste of time.<br />
d. Roland Brand, besides the County Council Library & Arts Services<br />
prize of €1,000 gets a laptop computer contributed by PC Factory.<br />
e. Roland's working hours are long and the work is intense, but he still<br />
likes to dedicate time to his passion: writing.<br />
2. We usually use shorter sentences when speaking and longer sentences<br />
in writing. Linking words provide a text with cohesion and illustrate how<br />
the parts of the text relate to each other<br />
We use and to add extra information, but to contrast ideas, because to<br />
explain the reason, besides to say that there is something additional<br />
included and although to indicate a contradiction.<br />
3. Go back to the text and copy all the sentences that contain these linking<br />
words into your notebook. Can you understand them better now?<br />
10 Join the sentences using and, but, because, besides or although.<br />
a. Ronald's life is very busy. He finds time to write fiction.<br />
b. Brand gets €1,000. He also gets a laptop computer.<br />
c. Imelda is a housewife. She writes short stories and poetry.<br />
d. Roland doesn't want to become a professional writer. He is happy with<br />
his career.<br />
e. Jo Campbell is from London. She is a school bus driver.<br />
f. She drives a school bus. She also dedicates her time to other hobbies.<br />
11 Study these additional linking words and their function. Which sentences from<br />
Exercise 10 can you rewrite using these options? In some cases you can / must<br />
switch the order of the sentences around (first sentence goes second).<br />
Function Middle of sentence<br />
To add a point and … In addition…, also…<br />
To contrast two points but … However, although …<br />
To note consequences because … So ...<br />
At the beginning<br />
to a new sentence<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
13
14<br />
UNIT 1<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
12 Complete this dialogue about the text with a partner. Practise with<br />
the recording and then role play it in front of the class.<br />
A: Now that you have some information about the competition, can you<br />
tell me why Roland Brand gets €1,000 and a laptop computer?<br />
B: _________________________________________________________.<br />
A: And why does he not want to become a professional writer?<br />
B: _________________________________________________________.<br />
A: So, if he doesn't want to be a professional writer, why does he write?<br />
B: _________________________________________________________.<br />
A: And do you know why Jo Campbell doesn't like watching TV?<br />
B: _________________________________________________________.<br />
13 Answer the questions and match your answers with the pictures.<br />
1 2 3<br />
a. Why do you need to put a stamp on the envelope?<br />
b. Why do you need to stop your car?<br />
c. Why do you need to use coins?<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
14 Choose the best linking word. (10 points)<br />
a. In order to communicate effectively, humans developed languages,<br />
signs and / but writing.<br />
b. Although / but sometimes people speak the same language they<br />
cannot communicate.<br />
c. You need to learn English and / because the world is becoming more<br />
and more globalised.<br />
d. It is easy to say I love you because / but more difficult to prove it.<br />
e. Although / besides a laptop the winner also gets a cash prize.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
15 Rewrite the passage below joining some of the sentences. Use linking<br />
words such as but, and, because, although, besides and others you know.<br />
�����������������������������������������������������������<br />
��������������������������������������������������������������<br />
������������������������������������������������������<br />
��������������������������������������������������������<br />
����������������������������������������������������������<br />
���������������������<br />
PLAY IT<br />
These are connectors tic-tac-toe.<br />
a. Play with a partner against another couple.<br />
b. Each pair must win three squares in a straight line to win the game, as in normal tic-tac-toe.<br />
c. Pairs win a square by saying a correct sentence with their chosen word, using a correct linking word.<br />
Example: I like watching documentaries and films on television.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
1 2<br />
watch love publish<br />
want announce arrive<br />
play spend catch<br />
3 4<br />
need open push<br />
pull study touch<br />
take visit write<br />
read arrive buy<br />
call drive finish<br />
give have make<br />
accept bake carry<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
file eat dance<br />
get hate identify<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
15
Mind<br />
What<br />
do they<br />
say?<br />
16<br />
Hey, look over<br />
there. Smoke<br />
signals!<br />
AM I GETTING THROUGH TO YOU?<br />
LISTENING<br />
UNIT 1<br />
T ea s er<br />
Help! My ...<br />
blanket … is ...<br />
on ... fire!<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
1 What do you think the expression get through in the title of the lesson means?<br />
a. Contact / communicate<br />
b. Finish / terminate<br />
c. Succeed / triumph<br />
2 Match the pictures below with these expressions.<br />
a. Ah, now I understand! b. Oh dear, does it hurt?<br />
c. Hey, look at them! d. Wow, that's big!<br />
e. Congratulations! Well done f. Oh, how interesting!<br />
1 2 3<br />
4 5 6<br />
3 Two words in each line rhyme - which ones?<br />
a. destination destitution information<br />
b. call hall sell<br />
c. reach rich speech<br />
d. better letter matter<br />
e. code mode rod<br />
For more rhymes you can visit the Rhyme Zone dictionary at<br />
www.rhymezone.com<br />
Lesson 2
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
Answer the questions and write the words in the grids. Read each letter<br />
marked in blue. The answer gives you the subject of the listening text.<br />
a. What do you use to send an e-mail?<br />
b. What do you use to call your friend in another city?<br />
c. What's another word for talk?<br />
d. What do you put in an envelope?<br />
e. What's another word for tell?<br />
a.<br />
b.<br />
c.<br />
d.<br />
e.<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Listen to the two recordings. Which one is a rap and which one is a<br />
poem?<br />
Listen again. Which of the two mentions different ways of<br />
communicating?<br />
Listen to the text you identified and in your notebook write at least<br />
four ways of communicating.<br />
Which expressions from Exercise 2 are mentioned in the second<br />
recording? Write them down in your notebook. What feelings do they<br />
express?<br />
Listen again and choose the best adjective to describe each piece of<br />
poetry.<br />
a. The first piece is<br />
i. sad ii. cheerful iii. critical<br />
b. The second piece is<br />
i. nostalgic ii. controversial iii. descriptive<br />
Mind<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
T ea s er<br />
Why do we listen? We listen<br />
for different reasons: for<br />
pleasure (music, bird song),<br />
to understand explanations,<br />
for instructions so that we<br />
know how to carry out a<br />
task, for information in the<br />
case of the news or the<br />
weather forecast, and also to<br />
get the main idea of a story<br />
or a narration.<br />
17
18<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
We use expressions such as<br />
Well done! or Wow, what a<br />
surprise! to express feelings<br />
of pleasure, surprise, interest<br />
etc. They are called<br />
interjections. There are other<br />
interjections such as Oh!,<br />
Um or Ah! and we use them<br />
quite often, usually more in<br />
speaking than in writing.<br />
People also use them when<br />
they don't know what to say,<br />
or to indicate that they are<br />
thinking about what to say.<br />
UNIT 1<br />
10 Listen again. Which of the two words is mentioned in each recording?<br />
Recording I Recording II<br />
a. i. rich ii. reach a. i. will ii. wheel<br />
b. i. feel ii. fill b. i. need ii. knit<br />
11 Listen once more and choose one of these titles for each piece.<br />
a. A Lesson in Communication b. Dance and Rap<br />
c. How I Miss my Little Girl d. When I Grow up<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Beside v/s besides<br />
1. Read these sentences from the listening text. Pay special attention to<br />
the preposition in bold.<br />
a. We can sign a sign or write a little rhyme besides making a call.<br />
b. We can type on our computer besides using a fax or sending a scooter.<br />
2. Compare these sentences.<br />
a. We can sign a sign or write a little rhyme besides making a call to a<br />
friend down the hall.<br />
b. We can make a call to a friend who lives beside us down the hall.<br />
c. We can type on our computer besides using a fax or sending a scooter.<br />
d. We can use the fax that is beside the computer on the desk.<br />
3. Besides is a preposition that means in addition to.<br />
Besides Paula she also invited Kate.<br />
4. Besides is also an adverb that means also.<br />
The film was too long. Besides, it was very boring.<br />
5. Beside is a preposition that means next to.<br />
Sit beside me, please!<br />
6. Read the examples from the text again. How many actions can the<br />
speaker take in each case?
12 Beside or besides?<br />
a. You should sit beside / besides your brother.<br />
b. No one talked to her besides / beside her mother.<br />
c. The cinema is besides / beside the supermarket.<br />
d. She works all day. Besides / beside, she has to do the housework.<br />
e. When she is sad she doesn't like any company besides / beside her pet cat.<br />
13 Form sentences putting these parts in the correct order. Change capitals<br />
to small letter where necessary.<br />
a. Is good at math - Although he - Before tests. - He likes to review<br />
b. Janis also likes - Cooking - Besides reading - And jogging.<br />
c. Much money - Because she doesn't have - An economy ticket -<br />
Grace is buying<br />
d. But she doesn't know - To speak French - Juliet knows how -<br />
Much German.<br />
14 The teacher will give you the transcript of the first recording. Practise it<br />
with a partner. Then make a presentation to the whole class. The best<br />
presentation gets a good mark!<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
15 Complete these dialogues expressing surprise, interest, sympathy or<br />
pleasure. Use the expressions in Exercise 2. Check with the recording and then<br />
practise the dialogues with your partner. Role play one in front of the class.<br />
a. A: Look at this! My finger is<br />
bleeding.<br />
B: _______________________!<br />
c. A: Jenny is going to London to<br />
study English.<br />
B: _______________________!<br />
b. A: I scored 7 on my science test.<br />
B: _______________________!<br />
d. A: 12,790,000 live in Tokyo.<br />
B: _______________________!<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
19
20<br />
UNIT 1<br />
16 Fill in the gaps in this text about different ways of communicating with<br />
the expressions in the box.<br />
· computer · gestures · photos · speaking · telephone<br />
We use various ways of communicating with each<br />
other; the most effective are _________ and _________,<br />
but these types of communication require people to be<br />
present in front of each other. The problem arises when<br />
two people are at a distance. The invention of the<br />
_________ makes it possible to communicate even when<br />
people are far away from each other. Unfortunately, this<br />
channel only allows us to use our voice but not images.<br />
However, the invention of the _________ helps<br />
us share a huge amount of information<br />
through other types of data such as<br />
written messages, _________<br />
and even videos.<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
17 Join the two parts of the dialogues. (10 points)<br />
Look mum, I can ride my bike.<br />
Karen has a really small dog.<br />
Danny can't go to the park with us.<br />
You divide the number by two and<br />
subtract 10.<br />
I can speak Spanish and English!<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
A B<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
Oh dear, what a pity.<br />
Congratulations! You are very<br />
good at languages.<br />
Oh, now I understand.<br />
Wow, that's really great, Annie.<br />
Wow, how tiny it is!<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
18 Work in pairs. Your friend is telling you about the way people<br />
communicate. Write down what he / she tells you using sentences with<br />
linking words such as and, because, or, although, besides, and but.<br />
Example:<br />
Jorge says that sometimes people speak the same language BUT they don't<br />
communicate. We need to communicate BECAUSE we live in society. To<br />
communicate we can use different channels, for example the telephone, email<br />
OR letters.<br />
PLAY IT<br />
Play “Getting nervous” in groups of four.<br />
a. Prepare cards with these linking words: although, besides, but, and, because and or.<br />
b. Place them face up on the table.<br />
c. Player 1 reads the first sentence and all the players must try to tap the right linking word .<br />
d. The Player who first puts his / her hand on the linking word says the complete sentence. If the<br />
sentence is correct, he / she wins 10 points; if it isn't, Player 2 reads the first sentence again.<br />
e. The game continues until all the sentences have been correctly completed.<br />
f. The winner is the player who has the most points.<br />
Sentences<br />
1. There is bread ___ butter for breakfast.<br />
2. His mother won't be there, ___ his father might.<br />
3. They are tired ___ they worked all night.<br />
4. ___ the sun was shining it wasn't very warm.<br />
5. Is your sister older ___ younger than you.<br />
6. ___ working as a teacher, he also writes poems in his spare time.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Listening<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
Mind<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
T ea s er<br />
We always talk like this,<br />
using our home telephone<br />
numbers.<br />
Yes, but look at Standing<br />
Bear. He bought a mobile<br />
phone only yesterday!<br />
21
22<br />
DECODING WRITING<br />
READING<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
When we give the reason<br />
for our actions, we use the<br />
word because.<br />
I am watching this film<br />
because I think it is interesting.<br />
We can also use since and<br />
as when the reason is known.<br />
Since I'm already in the<br />
cinema, I will watch the<br />
movie.<br />
As you already know, I like<br />
horror movies.<br />
UNIT 1<br />
1<br />
4<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Lesson 3<br />
2 Choose the best definition for the word alphabet.<br />
a. Set of symbols or characters that represent the sounds of a language in<br />
writing.<br />
b. Letters such as A, B, C that permit us to write messages and to<br />
communicate.<br />
c. Different drawings made by hand that represent the sounds in a<br />
spoken language.<br />
3<br />
Can you match the examples of alphabets (1 - 5) with their names (a. - e.)?<br />
1 2<br />
4<br />
a. Arabic b. Chinese c. Cyrillic d. Greek e. Latin<br />
Which culture do you think the pictures below represent? How do you<br />
know? Give reasons.<br />
a. Ancient Egyptian b. Ancient Greek c. Ancient Maya.<br />
1 2<br />
3<br />
Considering the pictures above and the information you have discussed,<br />
what do you think the text you are going to read will be about?<br />
5
Ashmolean Museum<br />
Beaumont Street<br />
Oxford, UK<br />
OX1 2PH<br />
Tel: (01865) 278000<br />
Fax: (01865) 278018<br />
Report No. 23/ 2008<br />
From: Prof, Geoff Harding<br />
To: Dr. Karen Rasmussen<br />
As requested by you, I am writing this report to inform you of the progress on the brochure we are<br />
preparing for the visitors to our museum and about the investigation on the writing on the Mayan tablet<br />
in the possession of our museum.<br />
Because the brochure is for tourists of all ages, including school children, we need to write it in simple<br />
language. This way, all readers can understand it and make the best use of our work. We also need to<br />
include lots of pictures because we want to make the brochure user-friendly and nice to look at. We need<br />
to get as many original pictures as possible and we need to include pictures of our own museum exhibits.<br />
Our work is going very well and faster than we thought because two graduate students are helping<br />
me with the preparation of the text and the pictures. I think it is best to write the brochure under the<br />
following headings:<br />
• Origin of Mayan writing • Composition - phonetic symbols and ideograms<br />
• Material used for writing • Recent discoveries<br />
Can you please also answer a few questions and requests so that I can continue my work?<br />
1. Are we getting any new students to help with the brochure?<br />
2. Are you sending us a photographer, with all the equipment to take good pictures?<br />
3. Are we printing more than 5,000 copies of the brochure or only 3,000? I need to know because of<br />
the costs.<br />
I'm sure you are very busy with the Roman Coin exhibition, but I need your reply as soon as possible<br />
because we are short of time.<br />
As to the second point of my report and the real origin of the tablet, I believe that it is the city of Palenque<br />
(1) and not Honduras or Guatemala because the tablet we have looks very similar to other tablets found<br />
at the location. And I think that we can decode the message on the tablet quite soon because all the<br />
information we have so far corroborates our theory.<br />
Please remember we are meeting on Tuesday evening for dinner to discuss new plans for the museum.<br />
Yours<br />
Prof. Geoff Harding<br />
______________________________________________<br />
(1) Near the Usumacinta River in the Mexican state of Chiapas.<br />
Source: Foundation for the Advancement of Mesoamerican Studies,<br />
on-line bulletin, and Ashmolean Museum, Oxford, UK<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
23
Mind<br />
24<br />
UNIT 1<br />
T ea s er<br />
Why was the police officer<br />
under the blanket?<br />
Because he was an<br />
under cover cop!<br />
5<br />
6<br />
Read the text on page 23 and check your predictions in Exercise 4.<br />
As you can see, the report on page 23 is presented in four different<br />
colours. Can you match each part with the corresponding topic?<br />
a. Progress report on the brochure<br />
b. Progress report on the investigation<br />
c. Introduction<br />
d. Questions and requests<br />
7 Why are some parts in the text on page 23 marked with bullet points (•)?<br />
a. Because the writer wants to make the text more interesting.<br />
b. Because the writer wants to enumerate several ideas in a short way.<br />
c. Because the writer wants to show that he knows how to write a report.<br />
8<br />
9<br />
11<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
What do we call the note indicated by the number (1) in the last paragraph<br />
of the text on page 23?<br />
a. Footnote. b. Title. c. Heading.<br />
Read the text on page 23 again and choose the best option to complete<br />
the sentences.<br />
a. Prof. Harding is working on the brochure<br />
i. alone. ii. with some students.<br />
b. The brochure will include<br />
i. text and pictures. ii. drawings and photos.<br />
c. Mayan writing is composed by<br />
i. hieroglyphics and letters. ii. phonetic and other symbols.<br />
d. Prof. Harding thinks the tablet he is investigating is from<br />
i. Mexico. ii. Honduras.<br />
10 Read the text on page 23 again and find these reasons. Write sentences in<br />
your notebook using because.<br />
a. Reason(s) for writing the report.<br />
b. Reason(s) for using simple language in the brochure.<br />
c. Reason(s) for including lots of pictures in the brochure.<br />
d Reason(s) why Prof. Harding needs a fast reply.<br />
Now match Prof. Harding's questions in the text on page 23 (1. - 3.) with<br />
Dr. Rasmussen's answers below (a. - c.).<br />
a. I think that we do not need too many copies of the brochure because it<br />
would be a waste of money.<br />
b. Gerald Standing is free to take photos next Thursday.<br />
c. I'm not sure if we can spare any extra people to help you any time soon.
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
The Present Continuous<br />
1. Read these sentences from the report on page 23.<br />
a. As requested by you, I am writing this report to inform you of the<br />
progress on the brochure.<br />
b. Two graduate students are helping me with the preparation of the<br />
text and the pictures.<br />
c. Are we getting any new students to help with the brochure?<br />
d. Are we printing 5,000 copies of the brochure?<br />
2. What do the sentences above refer to?<br />
a. Activities happening right now.<br />
b. Activities happening in the present but not necessarily this very moment.<br />
c. Activities happening in the near future, especially planned future events.<br />
3. All three answers are correct. Sentence a. refers to an activity happening<br />
right now. Sentence b. refers to an activity happening in the present but<br />
not necessarily at this very moment and sentences c. and d. refer to<br />
activities happening (or not) in the near future, especially in planned<br />
future events.<br />
4. Go back to the text and find three more sentences in the Present<br />
Continous. What do they refer to?<br />
12<br />
Which of these sentences refer to planned activities in the future?<br />
a. I'm now investigating the real origin of the tablet.<br />
b. I am meeting some friends after work.<br />
c. They are watching Batman and Robin on TV at the moment.<br />
d. Polly is coming to dinner tomorrow.<br />
e. John, are you sleeping?<br />
f. What are you doing at the weekend?<br />
13 Complete these short dialogues with an appropriate question referring to<br />
the underlined part.<br />
a. A: ___________________________________________________?<br />
B: We are going to Arica next month.<br />
b. A: ___________________________________________________?<br />
B: No, she is not going to the party with us on Tuesday.<br />
c. A: ___________________________________________________?<br />
B: He is visiting his grandparents at the weekend.<br />
d. A: ___________________________________________________?<br />
B: We are playing football after school today.<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
25
Mind<br />
26<br />
UNIT 1<br />
T ea s er<br />
Here are some examples of<br />
Mayan writing.<br />
14 Choose one option to complete each sentence.<br />
a. I am going to the cinema because / since I like the actors.<br />
b. As / Because you already know, we are changing the test to Monday.<br />
c. He is preparing the brochure because / since the museum needs it.<br />
d. Because / Since we are already here we can stay and enjoy it.<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
15 Jenna and Robert are preparing a report on their history project on<br />
Mayan writing. Prepare a short conversation saying what they need to do<br />
and why.<br />
Here are some points to help you.<br />
• Reasons for writing the report.<br />
• Reasons for putting lots of pictures.<br />
• Reasons for using a computer and not write it by hand.<br />
• Use the library or the Internet?<br />
• When to present it.<br />
Jenna: Why __________________?<br />
Robert: Because _______________<br />
Jenna: Do you think ___________?<br />
Robert: Yes, because ___________<br />
Jenna: Is it better to ____________?<br />
Robert: I think __________________. Do we need to ______________?<br />
Jenna: ___________. When do we need ________________?<br />
Robert: ______________________<br />
16<br />
Now listen to the conversation. Check your answers, practise with<br />
your partner and role play the conversation in front of the class.<br />
17 Fill in the gaps in the e-mail with the verb in the Present Continuous to<br />
refer to future plans.<br />
��������������������������������������������������������<br />
�������������������������������������������������������������<br />
���������������������������������������������������������������<br />
������������������������������������������������������������<br />
�����������������������������������������������������������<br />
�������������������������������������������������������������<br />
��������������������������������������������������������������������<br />
�������������������������������������������������������������<br />
�����������������������������������������������������������������<br />
��������������������������������
FAST CHECK<br />
18 Change the sentences in the negative form into the affirmative form<br />
and the ones in the affirmative form into questions. (10 points)<br />
a. He is not going to the doctor's tomorrow. (+)<br />
b. Conrad is travelling to Miami with his friends. (?)<br />
c. Geraldine is not meeting us for dinner. (+)<br />
d. Jim's flight is at 6 p.m. so they are leaving him at the airport. (?)<br />
e. They aren't planning to get married until next year. (+)<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
19 Write a short report on your progress in this lesson. Include an<br />
introduction, one or two sentences on the READING part, and one<br />
sentence on the MAKE CONNECTIONS part.<br />
PLAY IT<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
Invent a code and write a message using it.<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
a. Work in groups of four students and decide the message you would like to write.<br />
b. Write out what you would like to write and leave spaces in between the lines for creating your code.<br />
c. These are some examples of encoding, but you can invent your own code.<br />
i. Leave all consonants the same, but replace all vowels with the consonant that follows that<br />
vowel in the alphabet.<br />
ii. You can replace vowels using special symbols.<br />
Example:<br />
A = -- E = -.- I = .-. O = ..-- U = .-.-<br />
Wh--t .-.s th-.- m-.-ss- - g-.- s- - y.-.ng?<br />
d. Encode your message. If you want to make it easier, include the key to the code. If not, let the<br />
receivers work it out.<br />
e. Swap messages with another group and decode them.<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
27
Mind<br />
28<br />
VISIBLE BODY<br />
LISTENING<br />
UNIT 1<br />
T ea s er<br />
Some theories claim that<br />
people can communicate<br />
through the transfer of<br />
thoughts or feelings by means<br />
other than the five classical<br />
senses of sight, hearing,<br />
taste, smell and touch. This<br />
way of communication is<br />
called telepathy.<br />
1 How would you express the following in body language or gestures?<br />
a. Stop! b. Come here!<br />
c. Yes. d. No.<br />
e. My stomach is hurting. f. Be quiet!<br />
g. Hello. h. Let me think.<br />
2<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Lesson 4<br />
What part of the body do people most frequently use to express nonverbal<br />
communication? Rate from 1 (least common) to 5 (most common).<br />
Compare with a partner and discuss giving examples of non-verbal<br />
communication.<br />
face fingers<br />
hands<br />
legs shoulder
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
Because body language is so important in communication we often use<br />
body parts in idiomatic expressions. Can you match the meanings?<br />
a. John has a really big mouth.<br />
b. We don't see eye to eye on<br />
almost anything.<br />
c. My daughter Catalina is the<br />
apple of my eye.<br />
d. Everything in that new boutique<br />
costs an arm and a leg.<br />
e. Mmm, give me some more<br />
chocolate. I have a sweet tooth.<br />
i. I love sweet things such as<br />
cakes and ice-cream.<br />
ii. The things they sell there are<br />
really expensive.<br />
iii. We can't agree or<br />
compromise on things.<br />
iv. I love her more than anything<br />
else in the world.<br />
v. He talks too much and<br />
cannot keep secrets.<br />
How much of our communication does body language occupy? Choose a<br />
possible answer.<br />
a. 55% b. 80% c. 5%<br />
Listen and check your prediction in Exercise 4.<br />
6 What kind of programme is it?<br />
a. A radio talk show.<br />
b. A television talk show.<br />
c. A radio interview.<br />
7<br />
Listen again and write who expressed the feelings (speaker), and the<br />
expressions they used (expression).<br />
Surprise<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Pleasure / happiness<br />
Worry<br />
Interest<br />
Feeling Speaker Expression<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
29
30<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
Try to learn and use these<br />
expressions to express<br />
feelings, which are important<br />
in everyday language.<br />
It worries me a little.<br />
It's really interesting.<br />
What a surprise!<br />
It's such a pleasure.<br />
Let me tell you how happy I<br />
am.<br />
I'm also glad to be here.<br />
It's a pleasure.<br />
I'm a little worried about her.<br />
I also find it surprising.<br />
How interesting!<br />
UNIT 1<br />
8 Listen again. Are these statements true or false?<br />
a. Andrew Remington is a well-known actor.<br />
b. Gina Radcliff is preparing a new play.<br />
c. Only 7% of our communication is in words.<br />
d. More than half of our communication takes place through body<br />
language.<br />
9 Listen once more and choose the correct word.<br />
a. I'm a little worried about the word export / expert.<br />
b. I also find / found it surprising.<br />
c. We're preparing a new play / plan.<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
The Present Continuous (Continued)<br />
1. Read these sentences from the listening text. Pay special attention to the<br />
verb form in bold.<br />
a. On Wednesday all actors are meeting to discuss how to express anger.<br />
b. For example, we're interviewing people about their gestures and<br />
facial expressions.<br />
c. Others are meeting with psychologists to discuss communication<br />
through body language.<br />
2. The Present Continuous is used to talk about arrangements for events at<br />
a time later than now. There is a suggestion that more than one person<br />
knows about the event, and that there is some preparation for the event.<br />
a. Jim is going to Miami tomorrow so I am taking him to the airport - both<br />
Jim and I know about it and we have made the arrangements.<br />
b. I am leaving town next Monday - I already have my ticket.<br />
c. We are staying with friends when we get to Boston - both they and I<br />
agree to that.<br />
3. Listen to the last two exchanges of the conversation. Find and write two<br />
more example with the Present Continuous. Do they refer to future<br />
arrangements?<br />
BE CAREFUL! The Simple Present is used when a future event is part of a<br />
programme or time-table. Notice the difference between:<br />
a. We're having a staff meeting next Monday.<br />
b. We have a staff meeting next Monday as we always do.(It's on the time-table.)
10 Complete these dialogues with the question corresponding to the<br />
information in bold.<br />
a. A: ____________________________________________?<br />
B: All actors are meeting on Wednesday.<br />
b. A: ____________________________________________?<br />
B: Some actors are interviewing people next week.<br />
c. A: ____________________________________________?<br />
B: Other actors are meeting with psychologists to discuss ways of<br />
communicating.<br />
11 What arrangements have they made for the future? Write the complete<br />
sentences in your notebook.<br />
a. Juliet: meet Peter / train station b. Karin: go to concert / tomorrow<br />
c. Ken and Lucy: get married / June d. Mr and Mrs Livingston: buy a new<br />
house / next year<br />
12 Connect these sentences using and, or, but, because, although, besides.<br />
a. He knows about body language. He is a drama teacher.<br />
b. They use different costumes in the play. They use make-up.<br />
c. Lisa likes playing the guitar. She doesn't have time to practise.<br />
d. You can use the telephone. You can use the fax machine if you prefer.<br />
e. They are doing interviews. They are also meeting with psychologists.<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
31
32<br />
UNIT 1<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
13 Copy and complete this conversation in your notebook, using the<br />
expressions in the box. Check with the recording.<br />
14<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
16 Match the questions with the answers. (10 points)<br />
a. What is Becky doing on Monday?<br />
b. Is he flying to New York or<br />
Washington?<br />
c. Are they getting married soon?<br />
d. Why is Dell meeting Tom at the<br />
station?<br />
e. Who are you meeting after<br />
school?<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
· How interesting! · I'm glad · It's so nice<br />
· It worries me a little · What a surprise!<br />
Tricia: Hi, Nicola! ____________ to see you again.<br />
Nicola: Yes, ____________ to see you too.<br />
Tricia: Jennifer is here too.<br />
Nicola: ____________ Isn't she going to France in three day's time?<br />
Tricia: Yes, she is; but she's here today because her boyfriend has a little<br />
role in a new film.<br />
Nicola: ____________.<br />
Tricia: Yes, and she thinks he can get her into a film too.<br />
Nicola: ____________. She has really high hopes and may get disappointed.<br />
Practise the conversation with a partner and then role play it in front of<br />
the class.<br />
15 Put the words in order and write the correct sentences in your notebook.<br />
a. going / They /are / to / after / school / the / cinema.<br />
b. My / meeting / boss / is / some / people / important / tomorrow.<br />
c. She / is / month / taking / her / exams / English / next.<br />
d. The / is / on / visiting / a / salesman / client / Monday / new.<br />
0 - 3<br />
Review the lesson<br />
i. Yes, in June or July I think.<br />
ii. My friends - Karen and<br />
Sharon.<br />
iii. I'm not sure. I think she is<br />
going to a party.<br />
iv. Because he doesn't want to<br />
take a taxi.<br />
v. Neither - he's going to San<br />
Francisco.<br />
4 - 6<br />
Quite good<br />
7 - 10<br />
Excellent
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
17 Observe your classmates and make notes of the body language they use.<br />
Write a short paragraph listing the gestures and expressions they use and<br />
what they communicate with them.<br />
Example: Camila uses her hands a lot when she talks. She often says “ how<br />
interesting!” when she listens to people.<br />
18<br />
This proverb about communication is “glued together”. Write it correctly<br />
in your notebook and discuss its meaning.<br />
Listening<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
Twomonologuesdonotmakeadialogue.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
33
1<br />
34<br />
Look at the picture carefully. It is Mr. Brook Winston's living room. What does the picture tell you about<br />
him? Use the correct linking words (and, or, but, although, besides, because, since, as) to connect the<br />
parts of the sentences.<br />
a. Mr. Winston lives in London ___________________ he works in Essex ___________________ usually<br />
travels to work by car.<br />
b. ________________ he is a well-known pizza chef, he doesn't like cooking at home ________________<br />
he likes doing other things after work.<br />
c. Mr. Winston is married ___________________ he has two children.<br />
d. ___________________ playing the piano he also plays the violin, ___________________ he doesn't<br />
know how to play the trumpet.<br />
e. Mr. Winston paints beautiful pictures. He usually uses oil paints ___________________ water colours.<br />
f. ___________________ he speaks German very well he doesn't speak French ___________________<br />
he is taking lessons ___________________ he has some friends in France.<br />
g. He plays tennis ___________________ he is not playing right now.<br />
h. Mr. Winston uses the computer to chat to his friends in France ___________________ Spain.<br />
i. ___________________ he is a chef ___________________ knows about nutrition, he likes to eat<br />
healthy food. He is eating a salad now ___________________ drinking a glass of milk.<br />
UNIT 1
2<br />
Read the letter below. With your partner fill in the gaps with the correct linking words and ask and<br />
answer questions about Ciara and her plans for the future.<br />
12, Clondalkin Road<br />
Walkinstown<br />
Dublin 12<br />
Ireland<br />
Dear Salvador,<br />
My name is Ciara ____ I'm from Ireland.<br />
Originally, I'm from Galway ____ I am<br />
moving to Dublin next month ____<br />
I got a job there as a nurse.<br />
____ speaking English I also speak Gaelic - that's the original language of<br />
Ireland. When I get to Dublin I am planning to take Spanish lessons. ____ I like<br />
the language very much I would like to have a pen pal from South America<br />
____ practise my Spanish.<br />
____ I can play the tin whistle I can't play the Bodhrán, which is a typical<br />
Irish drum. Apart from Spanish I am planning to take Bodhrán lessons when I have<br />
a little more time - probably when I am already in Dublin.<br />
Next week, I am taking my final nursing exams ____ I am a little worried<br />
____ the exams are so important. I and other students are getting together<br />
this weekend to prepare for the exams.<br />
Can you tell me something about you? Do you play the guitar ____ any other<br />
instrument? What other languages do you speak apart from English ____ Spanish?<br />
I hope you will write to me soon.<br />
Love,<br />
Ciara.<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
35
READING - TWO ANNOUNCEMENTS<br />
36<br />
I.<br />
II.<br />
Zak and Theresa Jacob, from here on known as the proud parents, are<br />
delighted to announce the birth of their twins, Sahara and Aisha. We can<br />
hardly express our joy at the arrival of our baby girls - Sahara with 49 cm and<br />
3.5 kilos and her sister Aisha with 48 cm and 3.2 kilos who are now happily at<br />
home and waiting for your visit. You can bring gifts but if you can't, just bring<br />
lots of joy and smiles.<br />
Blessed with two babies sweet as can be<br />
We love this addition to our family!<br />
Four more little hands<br />
Four more little feet<br />
now we can say<br />
Our family is complete!<br />
UNIT 1<br />
Source: wwwhappygreetings.net<br />
"Ladies and gentlemen, this is Jenny O'Connell, your Flight - Service Manager<br />
speaking. Please put away all your hand baggage in the overhead<br />
compartments or under your seats. The seat belt sign is on so you need to take<br />
your seat and fasten your seat belt. Also make sure the back of your seat is<br />
straight and trays are in their full upright position.<br />
If you are sitting next to an emergency exit, please read the special instructions<br />
card located by your seat. You can also ask the flight attendant to help you.<br />
You need to turn off all cellular phones, pagers, radios and remote controlled<br />
toys for the full duration of the flight because these items can interfere with<br />
the navigational and communication equipment on this aircraft.<br />
We remind you that this is a non-smoking flight. Smoking is prohibited on the<br />
entire aircraft, including the lavatories.<br />
If you have any questions about our flight today, please don't hesitate to ask<br />
one of our flight attendants. Thank you."<br />
Source: www.airodyssey.net
1 Read the two announcements and identify which one (I or II) shows these characteristics. 6 pts.<br />
a. Formal language b. Informal language c. Joyful<br />
d. Serious e. Spoken f. Written<br />
2 Read the announcements again and choose the best option to complete the sentences.<br />
a. The twins were born with<br />
i. the same size and weight.<br />
ii. different size and weight.<br />
b. Visitors<br />
i. do not need to bring gifts.<br />
ii. need to bring gifts.<br />
c. The person speaking in the second announcement is<br />
i. the pilot.<br />
ii. The Flight Service Manager.<br />
d. The flight<br />
i. permits smoking.<br />
ii. does not permit smoking.<br />
e. Travellers<br />
i. can use their mobile phones.<br />
ii. can't use their mobile phones.<br />
LISTENING - THE MORSE CODE<br />
3 Listen to the recording. What kind of programme is it?<br />
a. A TV programme<br />
b. A radio programme<br />
4 Listen again and write down the following codes.<br />
a. Letter A: _______ b. Letter B: _______<br />
c. Number 1: _______ d. SOS: _______<br />
5 Listen once more and answer these questions.<br />
a. Is John a pilot or a naval officer?<br />
b. What forms of communication can be used in modern times?<br />
c. When was the Morse Code invented?<br />
d. How fast can good Morse code operators write?<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
5 pts.<br />
1 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
37
LANGUAGE<br />
6 Choose the best linking word in each sentence.<br />
a. Lisa is not going to the picnic and / because she is ill.<br />
b. Wilson can't play basketball because / but he is very good at tennis.<br />
c. I like orange juice because / but I don't like apple juice.<br />
d. Although / besides I like watching football I don't know how to play it.<br />
e. Although / Since we are here, let's have an ice-cream.<br />
38<br />
7 Match the sentences (a. - d.) with the corresponding pictures (1 - 4).<br />
a. Jenna and Gloria are going to an ice-cream parlour after school.<br />
b. So what time are you meeting John at the train station?<br />
c. Are you coming to the party on Thursday?<br />
d. I am playing football with some friends in the evening.<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
SPEAKING<br />
8 Complete the questions in these dialogues using the clues provided. Role play the completed<br />
dialogues with a partner.<br />
a. A: What colour / Marion / bedroom?<br />
B: She is painting it blue and red!<br />
b. A: Where / Jordan and her friends / handball?<br />
B: They are playing in the school gym.<br />
c. A: Why / Kate / eat only a small salad?<br />
B: Because she isn't hungry at the moment.<br />
d. A: When / you and Lynn / plan to meet?<br />
B: We are planning to meet after school today.<br />
UNIT 1<br />
5 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
10 pts.
WRITING<br />
9 Join the sentences in this text about communicating using linking words.<br />
Communication is a process between at least two people. When you communicate<br />
you understand what other people want to tell you. You offer your own feelings and<br />
reactions. You are not born with communication skills. You learn communications skills.<br />
We learn communication skills observing other people. We use words and sounds to<br />
communicate. We also use other means such as gestures and facial expressions.<br />
Communication is important. It helps us understand each other.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
1 - 14<br />
Not too good<br />
FINAL CHECK ✔ ✔<br />
Choose one alternative according to your performance.<br />
Speaking<br />
· I use English structures correctly.<br />
· I use varied and correct vocabulary.<br />
· Others can understand me.<br />
Writing<br />
· My writing is coherent and follows the central idea.<br />
· I use the correct sentence formation and sentence structure.<br />
· I use the correct spelling, punctuation, capitalisation and format.<br />
Reading<br />
· I am aware of the differences in tenses, gender and number.<br />
· I identify the main idea and understand the text as a whole.<br />
· I can locate details and look for specific information.<br />
Listening<br />
· I can get the general idea.<br />
· I understand the details and identify speakers.<br />
· I identify the source of listening texts and recognise the format.<br />
Group work<br />
· I share my ideas with the group.<br />
· I listen to and respect my partners' points of view.<br />
· I help solve problems and contribute with relevant information.<br />
15 - 34<br />
Acceptable<br />
Always<br />
Nearly Always<br />
Sometimes<br />
Never<br />
35 - 49<br />
Great!<br />
Use this clue to work out your score<br />
Never = 0<br />
Sometimes = 1<br />
Nearly Always = 2<br />
Always = 3<br />
If you get:<br />
0 - 10 = Watch out! You must look back<br />
and review the whole unit. Ask your<br />
teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
11 - 22 = Not too bad, but there are<br />
areas you still have problems with.<br />
Identify those areas and ask your<br />
teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
23 - 34 = You are doing fine, but you<br />
can certainly do better. Get together<br />
with a classmate and review your<br />
weak points.<br />
35 - 45 = Congratulations! Great<br />
progress - you may look ahead to the<br />
new unit and help your classmates who<br />
need to review.<br />
COMMUNICATION AND UNDERSTANDING<br />
10 pts.<br />
Total<br />
49 pts.<br />
39
40<br />
IN THIS UNIT YOU WILL LEARN TO:<br />
Reading: Find specific information / Identify the origin of<br />
texts<br />
Listening: Match information / Find specific information /<br />
Discriminate between correct and incorrect information<br />
Production: Express personal opinions and ideas / Refer to<br />
personal experiences<br />
Functions: Express opinions / Talk about duration of events /<br />
Refer to personal experience<br />
YOU WILL USE THE FOLLOWING TEXT TYPES:<br />
Reading: A brochure / A film script<br />
Listening: An extract from a book / A report<br />
YOU WILL ALSO LEARN:<br />
Grammar: Modal verbs may /might / The Past Continuous tense<br />
Vocabulary: Related to strange and wonderful events and<br />
phenomena<br />
YOU WILL PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THESE VALUES:<br />
Respect for different opinions and experiences
SET UP<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
Where near your house do you need to go if you want to do the following?<br />
Talk about your personal experiences.<br />
a. Get to a boat. b. Find a place to sleep.<br />
c. Put up your tent. d. Ask for information.<br />
e. Have a picnic. f. Get some food.<br />
Match the actions in exercise 1 with these symbols.<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
5<br />
How good are you at spotting mistakes? Three of these headlines taken from newspapers have one<br />
mistake each, and one of them has no mistakes. Find the mistakes and correct them.<br />
a.<br />
COSTA BRAVA - NEW PARADISE FOR TURISTS<br />
b. HURICAN MOVING TOWARDS NEW ORLEANS<br />
c. LOST CIVILISATION FOUND IN AMAZON FOREST<br />
d. TOO MEN ARRESTED IN BANK ROBBERY<br />
There are six pairs of antonyms in the box. Can you form the pairs?<br />
· clever · correct · familiar · heavy · light · ordinary<br />
· persistent · sporadic · strange · stupid · wonderful · wrong<br />
You can find the 10 most common typos (typing mistakes) at<br />
http://www.hongkiat.com/blog/10-most-common-typos-in-blogging/<br />
6<br />
41
42<br />
WELCOME TO NEW ZEALAND<br />
READING<br />
UNIT 2<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Classify the words in the box under the corresponding heading.<br />
Tourism<br />
Places Things we do People<br />
What films are these photos from?<br />
Lesson 1<br />
· ballroom · chef · dance · drive · golf course · guide<br />
· highway · hill · hotel · life-guard · manager · maid<br />
· receptionist · restaurant · sheep farm · skydive · stay<br />
· swimming pool · travel · use · village · visit<br />
Read the information in the chart. How long do the events last / take?<br />
Say / Write sentences in your notebook.<br />
Example: A film lasts one and a half hours.<br />
A trip to Easter Island takes 5 hours. / It takes 5 hours to travel<br />
to Easter Island.<br />
Event Duration<br />
A film One and a half hours<br />
A class 45 minutes<br />
Our summer holiday 2 months<br />
A trip to Easter Island 5 hours<br />
A pop concert 2 hours<br />
Eating a pizza 10 minutes<br />
4 Which of these do you think you can find in a tourism brochure?<br />
a. Attractions. b. Costs.<br />
c. FAQs (frequently asked questions). d. Maps / directions.<br />
e. Travel dates. f. How to get to the nearest hospital.
HOBBITON HHOBBITON MOVIE MOVIE SET & FARM FARM TOUR<br />
TOUR<br />
The Hobbiton Movie Set & Farm Tour is a real must-do for every Lord<br />
of the Rings (LOTR) fan travelling through New Zealand. There are just<br />
so many things to do in Hobbiton and on our real-life sheep farm. Your<br />
experienced tour guides take you through the ten-acre site full of hills<br />
where the LOTR films were made. The guides are happy to explain all<br />
about the little people's village and tell you stories about the filming<br />
process. Optionally, you may take the full tour in a horse-drawn<br />
carriage and visit the cheese making facility located 3 miles from<br />
Hobbiton. The duration of the Hobbiton tour is one and a half hours.<br />
The cheese farm tour might take an additional 45 minutes to an hour.<br />
After the tour, we recommend that you stay for at least a few days in<br />
our luxury hotel where our multi-lingual receptionists say hello to you<br />
in four different languages. You may take a warm bath in a beautifully<br />
decorated room prepared by our experienced staff who know how to<br />
make a guest welcome. After you rest, we invite you to our gourmet<br />
restaurant where it takes our chef, a native of Thailand, only 25<br />
minutes to prepare any dish and you may choose from a menu from<br />
five continents. Or, you might want to try our delicious “finger foods”<br />
such as chips, vegetable sticks and a variety of dips.<br />
And how about children? Kids may use the playground facilities or the video room or they may take<br />
a swim in the indoor swimming pool (with a life-guard) and enjoy a mini-golf course. Adults may<br />
use the bar, dance in the 5 x 5 metre ballroom, or use the full-sized golf course.<br />
Talk to our manager about other activities which include:<br />
• Tandem Skydives • Hot Air Ballooning • Paintball Shooting<br />
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS<br />
Q.1:Does Hobbiton have conference facilities?<br />
A.1: Yes, it's a great venue for weddings, seminars and other celebrations.<br />
Q.2:Is there an extra charge for additional activities and excursions?<br />
A.2: The costs depend on the activity.<br />
Q.3:How long does it take to get to Hobbiton?<br />
A.3: It takes two hours by car from Auckland but it might take up to four hours by coach or three<br />
and a half hours by train.<br />
Q.4:Is it possible to book my visit through a website?<br />
A.4: Yes, bookings are on-line, or by phone, fax or letter.<br />
Room types:<br />
• Single • Double • Family can (might accommodate up to 6 people)<br />
How to get here from Auckland: Take State Highway 27 and turn south after Bombay Hills.<br />
Bookings at<br />
Ph: +64 (0) 7 888 9913<br />
Fax: +64 (0) 7 888 7498<br />
Email: office@hobbitontours.co.nz<br />
Website www.hobbitontours.com<br />
Source : http://www.hobbitontours.com/gallery/HobbitonFlashGallery.aspx?ID=11970<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
43
Mind<br />
44<br />
UNIT 2<br />
T ea s er<br />
The word holiday is a<br />
compound word made up of<br />
two other words - holy,<br />
meaning saintly, and day.<br />
So a holiday is originally a<br />
day on which people do not<br />
work to celebrate their<br />
religious beliefs.<br />
Person in charge<br />
8 Are these statements true or false? Correct the false statements.<br />
a. The cheese making facility is located 45 miles from Hobbiton.<br />
b. The chef is from Thailand.<br />
c. It takes 25 minutes to prepare the finger foods on the menu.<br />
d. It is possible to celebrate weddings and seminars at Hobbiton.<br />
e. Children may use the ballroom and the full-sized golf course.<br />
f. People may only book in person.<br />
9<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
5<br />
Read the text and check your predictions in Exercise 4.<br />
6 Read the text again and find the answers to these questions.<br />
a. How long is the Hobbiton tour?<br />
b. How long might the additional sheep farm tour take?<br />
c. How long does it take the chef to prepare any dish?<br />
d. How long is the car journey from Auckland to Hobbiton?<br />
e. Does it take more or less time to go to Hobitton by train than by car?<br />
f. How long is the trip from Auckland to Hobbiton by coach?<br />
7<br />
Read the text again and write the name of the person in charge.<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
Activities<br />
a. Cooking the food.<br />
b. Extra activities.<br />
c. Looking after children in the<br />
swimming pool.<br />
d. Preparing the hotel rooms.<br />
e. Telling tourists about the farm and<br />
the film making process.<br />
f. Welcoming the guests.<br />
Fill in the booking form for Hobbiton farm with your own personal details.<br />
You can use your imagination!<br />
First Name: ________________________________ Surname: ________________________________<br />
Full address: ___________________________________________ Telephone Number: ____________<br />
Language spoken: ___________________________ E-mail address: ___________________________<br />
Form of payment (tick one): Credit card: ___ Cheque: ___ Cash: ___<br />
Booking form (tick one): Fax: ___ E-mail: ___ Website: ___ Letter: ___ Telephone: ___<br />
Type of room (tick one): Single: ___ Double: ___ Family room: ___<br />
Full tour or Hobbiton only? ____________________________________________________________<br />
Extra attractions? ____________________________________________________________________
10<br />
Write at least three other questions you could ask the Hobbiton Manager<br />
before you book a holiday. Ask your partner to answer them.<br />
11 Choose the correct word, say or tell.<br />
a. I get really angry when you tell / say lies.<br />
b. When you see Sean, could you tell / say hello for me?<br />
c. Please, could you tell / say your sister that I can't meet her tonight?<br />
d. They tell / say Georgette is French, but she could also be Canadian.<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
May / might<br />
1. Study these sentences from the text paying special attention to the<br />
words in bold.<br />
a. You may take the full tour in a horse-drawn carriage.<br />
b. Kids may use the playground facilities or the video room.<br />
c. The cheese farm tour might take an additional 45 minutes.<br />
d. It might take up to four hours by coach or three and a half hours by train.<br />
2. What do the sentences express?<br />
a. Suggestion b. Polite request. c. Possibility.<br />
3. The answer is c - we are expressing that something is possible (we are<br />
making a prediction) now or for the future. The only difference is the<br />
degree of possibility.<br />
a. It may rain tomorrow - it is quite possible it will rain tomorrow(+).<br />
b. It might rain tomorrow -it is less possible it will rain tomorrow(–).<br />
4. Go back to the reading text. Find and copy all the sentences with may or<br />
might. Can you identify the degree of possibility?<br />
12<br />
Choose may or might.<br />
a. Where is he from?<br />
He ______ be from Cataluña because his name is Ignasi Barceló.<br />
b. What do you think you will do on your winter holiday?<br />
I'm not sure yet. We ______ go to Valdivia or Puerto Montt.<br />
c. Look at the clouds! They are heavy and black.<br />
Yes, it ______ rain really soon.<br />
d. Is she from Canada?<br />
She ______ be. Why do you ask?<br />
Because of her accent - she speaks French but with a different accent.<br />
13 Make predictions using may / might and the prompts provided . Write the<br />
sentences in your notebook.<br />
a. class / organise / picnic or a party<br />
b. you / study / gastronomy or marketing<br />
c. your friend / go to Arica or Calama<br />
d. petrol prices / increase or decrease<br />
e. you / see the film "Benjamin Button" on Saturday or on Sunday<br />
Danger<br />
Say and tell mean decir, but<br />
they are used differently.<br />
You say something but you<br />
tell someone something.<br />
I said goodbye / I said<br />
goodbye to Mary, but I am<br />
telling Mary a story.<br />
Certain expressions are<br />
always used with tell: tell<br />
jokes, tell the truth, tell a lie,<br />
while others are always used<br />
with say: say prayers, say<br />
good bye, say hello.<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
45
46<br />
1<br />
a.<br />
UNIT 2<br />
Oh dear, it may<br />
rain any moment<br />
now.<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
14 In pairs, complete this conversation discussing different options to<br />
celebrate your school anniversary. Use the expressions in the box.<br />
· might also · might go to<br />
· might have a picnic · might organise<br />
A: We have different options. For example, we _____ the seaside on a big school trip.<br />
B: We might, but it depends on the weather.<br />
A: Or we _____<br />
B: Yes, but a picnic also depends on the weather.<br />
A: Or we _____ a music and dance show.<br />
B: Actually, that's a great idea.<br />
A: Alternatively, we _____ do a cooking competition.<br />
B: Not really, we need too many ingredients and they are expensive.<br />
A: So, what's the best option?<br />
B: The best idea is the music and dance show.<br />
15 Match the expressions in the bubbles (a. - c.) with the pictures (1 - 3).<br />
2<br />
b.<br />
If he hurries up he<br />
may still catch it.<br />
If you take your<br />
medicine you may feel<br />
better tomorrow.<br />
16 Use the information in the chart to answer the questions in the dialogue<br />
on page 47.<br />
Event Duration<br />
Trip from home to airport 50 minutes<br />
Flight Manchester - London 1 hour 10 minutes<br />
Bus trip from airport to uncle's house 45 minutes<br />
Whole trip ?<br />
c.<br />
3
Gordon: So, how long does it take to get to the airport from your house?<br />
Susan: _____________________________________________________<br />
Gordon: And what's the duration of the flight from Manchester to London?<br />
Susan: _____________________________________________________<br />
Gordon: And then how long is the bus ride from the airport to your uncle's<br />
house?<br />
Susan: _____________________________________________________<br />
Gordon: And how long does the whole trip take?<br />
Susan: _____________________________________________________<br />
Gordon: Wow! That's really long!<br />
17 Listen to the recording, compare your answers and practise the<br />
dialogue in pairs.<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
18<br />
Fill in the gaps in the sentences with may or might.<br />
(✔ = weak probability; (✔✔ = strong probability). (10 points)<br />
a. (✔✔) If it's sunny tomorrow we _____________ go to the beach.<br />
b. (✔) I´m not sure yet but I _____ study engineering or computer sciences.<br />
c. (✔✔ ) The economic situation is not very good and unemployment<br />
_____ increase.<br />
d. (✔) I tried phoning him but he doesn't answer. He _____ be out or<br />
taking a shower.<br />
e. (✔) Don't worry! It's not too late. Your friend _____ still come to the<br />
party.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
19 Your friend Oliver is organising an activity to celebrate your school<br />
anniversary. What events can you recommend? How long might each<br />
event take?<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
47
Why do we need to spell<br />
correctly? We need to spell<br />
correctly because:<br />
• Poor spelling creates a<br />
bad impression.<br />
• It is the first thing a reader<br />
notices.<br />
• Examiners, teachers, and<br />
prospective employers pay<br />
attention to the way we<br />
write.<br />
• Even in these days of word<br />
processors and spell<br />
checks there are times<br />
when we need to<br />
handwrite something.<br />
Mind<br />
48<br />
THE STRANGE THINGS WE DO<br />
LISTENING<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
UNIT 2<br />
T ea s er<br />
Plis us the dor<br />
at the bak -<br />
this won is<br />
brouken!<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
1 Choose the best definition of the word TYPO.<br />
a. a grammar error<br />
b. a punctuation error<br />
c. a typing error<br />
2<br />
3<br />
Can you detect one spelling mistake in each sentence?<br />
Lesson 2<br />
aa. It is absolutely necesary to pay attention to the recording.<br />
b. One of the most comon typos is to omit a letter in a word.<br />
c. What a surprising stori!<br />
d. If you want to get a good mark in the test you must spell corectly.<br />
Which of the expressions below do you think we use to express opinions<br />
and points of view? Complete them using your personal ideas and<br />
experiences.<br />
Example: I think that people should work less and rest more.<br />
a.<br />
I think that …<br />
d.<br />
f.<br />
From my point<br />
of view …<br />
b.<br />
What you<br />
want …<br />
In my<br />
opinion ….<br />
g.<br />
e.<br />
According<br />
to …<br />
c.<br />
It seems<br />
to me …<br />
I believe<br />
that ….
4<br />
5<br />
· amazing · clever · incredible · ordinary · peculiar<br />
· positive · smart · typical · unusual · weird<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Listen to the recording and check your predictions in Exercise 4.<br />
6 Choose the best title for each item of news.<br />
a. Eradicating Typos and Errors by All Means<br />
b. The Incredible Adventures of the Typo Man<br />
c. Teaching a Parrot to Speak<br />
d. Talking Parrot Finds his Way Home<br />
7<br />
8<br />
Read the words in the box. Look up those you do not know in a<br />
dictionary. Which ones would you expect to find in a listening text about<br />
strange things that we do?<br />
Which of these places were not mentioned in the news?<br />
· America<br />
· Boston<br />
· Massachusetts · Tokyo<br />
Listen again and tick the correct column.<br />
· Santiago<br />
Which news item mentions<br />
an organisation?<br />
an address?<br />
the name of a policeman?<br />
one common mistake?<br />
Item 1 Item 2<br />
· China<br />
· Washington<br />
· Japan<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
49
50<br />
UNIT 2<br />
9 Listen once more and complete these sentences from the news.<br />
a. You might want to _______ some unusual but positive _______.<br />
b. According to Mr. Deck it's _______ to speak and _______ correctly.<br />
c. We, on our part, think it's _______ that Mr. Deck might be _______!<br />
d. He recited his _______ and address to a man in the _______.<br />
e. In my ______ it's ________.<br />
f. It‘s possible smart _______ like Yosuke might help Mr. Deck in his typo<br />
_______ campaign!<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
10 Which sentences from Exercise 9 express a point of view?<br />
11<br />
The words highlighted in these sentences appeared in the items of news you<br />
listened to, but they have been “scrambled”. Can you “unscramble” them?<br />
a. They travel around gnsiera typos and errors.<br />
b. The parrot followed the instructions of his msaert.<br />
c. The pomanlice took the bird to the owner.<br />
d. She is a very vepitios person.<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Expressing possibility<br />
1. We use may / might to express possible events in the present and the<br />
future. However, we can use other expressions. Read these examples<br />
from the recording paying special attention to the words in bold.<br />
a. Maybe you want to hear = You might want to hear, some unusual<br />
but positive news.<br />
b. Language is an important part that possibly makes the difference =<br />
language is an important part that might make the difference,<br />
between humans and animals.<br />
c. We think it's possible that Mr. Deck is right = Mr Deck might / may<br />
be right.<br />
2. Look at other examples.<br />
Maybe they will visit us next year = They may visit us next year.<br />
The train is possibly late = The train might be late.<br />
It is possible that he is lost = He might be lost.<br />
3. It is possible to use may / might in short answers.<br />
A: Is Gina coming to the party? B: She might.<br />
A: Are they at home right now? B: They may be.<br />
4. Listen to the second item of news again. Find three more sentences<br />
that express possibility and write them twice in your notebook, once<br />
using may / might, and once using maybe, possibly or it‘s possible that.
12 Re-write these sentences using might or may.<br />
a. Maybe Tina and Leo are getting married soon.<br />
b. It's possibly John's book.<br />
c. Maybe Laura will not come to school today.<br />
d. It's possible they will not like this kind of food.<br />
e. Someone is knocking on the door. It's possible that it is Stewart.<br />
13 Now re-write the sentences using maybe, possibly or it is possible.<br />
a. Geraldine might be in the library.<br />
b. His telephone may be disconnected.<br />
c. My boss might be in another office.<br />
d. We may travel to Greece next year.<br />
e. I may get a haircut tomorrow.<br />
14 Give short answers using may / might.<br />
a. A: Is that your bag in the corner?<br />
B: It _______________________________________________________<br />
b. A: Are they coming tomorrow?<br />
B: They _____________________________________________________<br />
c. A: Do they have time to help us?<br />
B: They ________________________________________________ have.<br />
d. A: It's so cold! Do you think it's going to snow?<br />
B: It _______________________________________________________<br />
e. A: Are you going to see Jane tomorrow?<br />
B: I _______________________________________________________<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
15 Choose one of the two stories you listened to and write a short paragraph<br />
expressing your personal opinion about the situation described. Use the<br />
expressions in Exercise 3.<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
51
52<br />
UNIT 2<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
16 Take turns to say the statements below with your partner, expressing your<br />
opinion. You can use the openings in the bubbles.<br />
I think that…<br />
According to …<br />
In my opinion ….<br />
It seems to me …<br />
I believe<br />
that ….<br />
From my point<br />
of view …<br />
a. This unit is really easy! b. Ice-cream is better than chocolate. c. Everybody loves Maroon Five.<br />
d. English is the most important<br />
language in the world.<br />
e. People shouldn't smoke in<br />
public places.<br />
f. Everybody looks thin in black<br />
clothes.<br />
17 Listen to the recording and compare your sentences.<br />
Then practise with the recording, paying special attention to accentuation<br />
and intonation.
FAST CHECK<br />
18 Choose the best option to complete the sentences. (10 points)<br />
a. A: Are your friends coming to visit you next weekend?<br />
B: I'm not sure. They might / It possibly is.<br />
b. A: Is the Italian restaurant open on Sundays?<br />
B: It's possible. / Might open.<br />
c. A: Do we have any sugar?<br />
B: We might have. / It is possibly.<br />
d. A: Do you think the children are hungry?<br />
B: Maybe not. / Might not.<br />
e. A: Are these Susan's glasses?<br />
B: May be. / They might be.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
PLAY IT<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
Find letters on the computer screen to complete these words from the<br />
lesson. Each letter can be used only once.<br />
A ___ A ___ I ___ G<br />
S M ___ ___ T<br />
U ___ ___ S ___ ___ L<br />
P ___ ___ U L ___ A R<br />
W ___ I ___ D<br />
O R ___ I N ___ R ___<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Listening<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
Y E U A<br />
M C<br />
R I<br />
A<br />
N<br />
Y<br />
R Z E E<br />
C D R<br />
I A<br />
A L E N<br />
U<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
53
Mind<br />
54<br />
So it' s true. It<br />
IS raining cats<br />
and dogs.<br />
Danger<br />
TWISTER, TWISTER<br />
READING<br />
UNIT 2<br />
T ea s er<br />
Not all plurals in English are<br />
formed by adding -s or -es.<br />
One irregular plural is the<br />
word phenomenon, whose<br />
plural is phenomena.<br />
Other words (mainly of Latin<br />
origin) that form their plural in<br />
the same way are:<br />
bacterium - bacteria<br />
criterion - criteria<br />
curriculum - curricula<br />
medium - media<br />
memorandum - memoranda<br />
symposium - symposia<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
See if you can guess the jumbled weather words.<br />
eic mcliate mihud nwid ogf<br />
Lesson 3<br />
Match the descriptions (a. - d.) with the words below (i. - iv.) and the<br />
pictures of the natural phenomena (1 - 4).<br />
a. Visible and very fine water drops or ice particles suspended in the<br />
atmosphere at high altitudes.<br />
b. A visible flash of light happening when there is an abrupt natural<br />
electric discharge in the atmosphere.<br />
c. Frozen precipitation in the form of white hexagonal ice crystals falling<br />
down in soft, white flakes.<br />
d. Water condensed from atmospheric vapour and falling in drops.<br />
i. cloud ii. lightning iii. rain iv. snow<br />
1 2<br />
3 4<br />
What do we use these instruments for?<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
Anemometer Barometer Thermometer Weather vane<br />
a. We use it to measure air pressure.<br />
b. We use it to measure the temperature of the air.<br />
c. We use it to measure wind speed.<br />
d. We use it to show which direction the wind is blowing from.<br />
You can find lots of words related to the weather, the climate and<br />
natural phenomena at www.weatherwizkids.com
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
Which of the words in the box would you expect to find in texts about<br />
natural phenomena?<br />
· break · cyclone · disaster · erosion<br />
· instrument · measure · noise · roar · storm<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Read the texts quickly and check your predictions in Exercise 4.<br />
Read the texts again and identify the origin of each.<br />
a. Text ___ is a part of a book. b. Text ___ is a part of a film script.<br />
c. Text ___ is a part of a report.<br />
Read the texts again and match each text with a place.<br />
Text I Text II Text III<br />
Kansas Kentucky Oklahoma<br />
Read the texts again and tick where appropriate.<br />
In which of the texts can you find references to I II III<br />
a. a description of a family?<br />
b. a place where people can hide?<br />
c. a scared pet?<br />
d. the exact shape of the described natural phenomenon?<br />
e. the sound this natural phenomenon makes?<br />
Read the text once more and find at least three words to replace the word<br />
twister.<br />
twister<br />
Mind<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
T ea s er<br />
We measure the intensity of<br />
tornadoes according to the<br />
Fujita Scale. Tornados can<br />
range from F0 - a mild<br />
tornado called the gale<br />
tornado with little damage<br />
to people and property<br />
through to F5, known as<br />
the incredible tornado,<br />
which can destroy strong<br />
houses, move cars into the<br />
air and uproot very big<br />
trees. There is also an F6<br />
tornado called the<br />
Inconceivable tornado - it<br />
has not happened as yet in<br />
the world.<br />
You can see the full Fujita<br />
scale at<br />
http://www.tornadoproject.com/<br />
55
56<br />
I.<br />
II.<br />
UNIT 2
III.<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
57
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
58<br />
UNIT 2<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
10<br />
Look back at the texts and decide who might have said the following<br />
sentences, Dorothy, Professor Jones or Jo's father.<br />
a. ________: “If we hurry up we might make it to the cellar!”<br />
b. ________: “I wonder if I may ever get back home!”<br />
c. ________: “I saw big pieces of debris under the twister.”<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
The Past Continuous tense.<br />
1. Compare these sentences from the texts.<br />
a. In the far North the wind was whistling.<br />
b. Uncle Harry stood up.<br />
c. Dorothy was going up and up.<br />
d. The house whirled around two or three times.<br />
2. All the sentences show actions in the past, but they use different tenses.<br />
We use the Simple Past tense (sentences b. and d.) when the action<br />
started and finished in the past. In sentences a. and c. we use the Past<br />
Continuous tense to indicate that the action was continuous.<br />
3. Here are more examples of the Past Continuous tense.<br />
a. Uncle Henry was sitting on the doorstep.<br />
b. She was looking at the sky too.<br />
c. Prof. Jones and I were getting close to the National Weather Service.<br />
4. Go back to the texts and find all the sentences in the Past tense or the Past<br />
Continuous tense. Which actions finished and which were continuous?<br />
11<br />
Complete these sentences using the verb in brackets in the Past<br />
Continuous tense.<br />
a. Dorothy __________ Toto in her arms. (hold)<br />
b. Aunt Em __________ the trap door. (open)<br />
c. The professors __________ to the National Weather Station. (go)<br />
12 Use the prompts to write sentences in the Past Continuous tense.<br />
a. Belinda / sit / armchair / watch / TV<br />
b. Glenn / eat / sandwich / drink / milk<br />
c. The scouts / packing /their backpacks<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
13 Write about a natural phenomenon you witnessed - a snow storm, a<br />
thunder storm, very heavy rain, a flood, etc. Use the weather vocabulary<br />
from Exercise 1.
HAVE A CHAT<br />
14 Complete the conversation about Prof. Jones's personal experience.<br />
Use words from the box and then check with the recording.<br />
· funnel · personally witnessed · some two minutes<br />
· roar and rumble · terrified<br />
15<br />
Reporter: I understand it was your personal experience, Professor Jones.<br />
Prof. Jones: Yes, I _________ the tornado.<br />
Reporter: So, were you scared, Professor Jones?<br />
Prof. Jones: I was _________.<br />
Reporter: What did the tornado look like?<br />
Prof. Jones: It looked like a _________.<br />
Reporter: What was the noise like?<br />
Prof. Jones: It sounded like a loud _________.<br />
Reporter: How long did the twister last?<br />
Prof. Jones: It lasted _________.<br />
Practise and role play the conversation with a partner.<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
16 Choose the correct alternative. (10 points)<br />
a. So what was she doing?<br />
i. She cooked dinner. ii. She was cooking dinner<br />
b. Were they standing or sitting?<br />
i. They were sitting. ii. They stood.<br />
c. Did she tell you about it?<br />
i. No, she didn't. ii. No, she wasn't telling me about it.<br />
d. Where were you going?<br />
i. I was going to the shop. ii. I went to the shop.<br />
e. What was she painting the picture with?<br />
i. She was using oil paints. ii. She painted the kitchen.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
Mind<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
T ea s er<br />
Heve are some proverbs<br />
and saying about the<br />
weather:<br />
• If birds fly low wind is<br />
going to blow.<br />
• A sunshing shower won‘t<br />
last half an hour.<br />
• The sharper the blast the<br />
sooner it‘s past.<br />
• When a cow tries to<br />
scratch her ear it means a<br />
shower is very near.<br />
59
60<br />
EYEWITNESS REPORTS<br />
LISTENING<br />
UNIT 2<br />
1<br />
2<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Lesson 4<br />
Look at these pictures. Which creatures do you think are real and which<br />
ones are not? Why?<br />
1. Hairless guinea pig 2. Owl cat<br />
3. Sasquatch 4. Smiley fish<br />
Look at the pictures below. Choose one and in pairs answer the questions<br />
about the story they illustrate. As you are only guessing, express your<br />
opinion using the beginnings in the box.<br />
a. What time do you think it is?<br />
b. What is the weather like?<br />
c. Where are the people?<br />
d. What is happening?<br />
e. What is the end of the story?<br />
· From my point of view … · I believe that ….<br />
· In my opinion …. · I think that… · It seems to me …
3<br />
Find the words below in the Word Search Puzzle. Words can be placed<br />
horizontally, vertically or diagonally, up or down.<br />
aircraft amazing creature excited<br />
frightened scared shocked<br />
a n o d a f f j t y d s<br />
d b x i t m v f m y f h<br />
c d p q w x a z c s h o<br />
r g l s ñ r w z f g o c<br />
e h p n c y e v i d b k<br />
a a v r s b t e u n c e<br />
t m i j u r l k y b g d<br />
u a s x e x c i t e d q<br />
r f r i g h t e n e d t<br />
e h k p z s c a r e d l<br />
4 You will hear two people talking about things they saw with their own eyes.<br />
a. What kind of things do you think they saw?<br />
b. How do you think they felt?<br />
5<br />
6<br />
i. Excited. ii. Shocked. iii. Scared. iv. Happy.<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Listen to the two recordings and check your predictions in Exercise 4.<br />
How do we know that the two people in the recordings were the eyewitnesses<br />
of the events? Choose two best options.<br />
a. Because their account is in the first person.<br />
b. Because the account is in the Past tense.<br />
c. Because they use expressions such as: "with my own eyes", "personally".<br />
d. Because they use questions and answers.<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
61
Mind<br />
62<br />
UNIT 2<br />
T ea s er<br />
Why are black cats such<br />
good singers?<br />
Because they‘re very<br />
mewsical!<br />
7 Listen again and choose the best answer. Justify your choice.<br />
Conversation I<br />
a. Where does the conversation take place?<br />
i. In a school.<br />
ii. In someone's house.<br />
b. Who are the protagonists?<br />
i. A husband and wife.<br />
ii. Two friends.<br />
c. Where was the woman?<br />
i. In a park.<br />
ii. In the forest.<br />
d. What did the woman see?<br />
i. A farmer's dog.<br />
ii. A strange creature.<br />
Conversation II<br />
a. Where does the conversation take place?<br />
i. In a Military Academy.<br />
ii. At a police station.<br />
b. Who are the protagonists?<br />
i. A plane pilot and his boss.<br />
ii. Two police officers<br />
c. Where was the man?<br />
i. In an office.<br />
ii. On a plane.<br />
d. What did the man see?<br />
i. A hot air balloon.<br />
ii. A UFO.<br />
8 Listen to Conversation I again and choose the word you hear.<br />
a. You saw a ghost / goat.<br />
b. I was walking down the path / patch.<br />
c. We had nothing for desert / dessert.<br />
d. Let me guess / check.<br />
e. The creature looked human / horrid.<br />
9<br />
Listen to Conversation II again. Which of these expressions does the<br />
speaker use to state his personal opinion?<br />
a. I believe I saw …<br />
b. I think they were …<br />
c. From my point of view …<br />
d. But I personally think ….<br />
e. If you ask me …<br />
f. According to me….
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
The Past Continuous (continued)<br />
1. Read these examples from the recording.<br />
a. It wasn't walking on all fours like a dog.<br />
b. What were you doing in a forest?<br />
c. It wasn't moving or advancing.<br />
2. Pay attention to the form. Like all verb tenses that use the verb to be we<br />
form the negative form adding not to the verb to be, and we form the<br />
interrogative form inverting the order.<br />
We were not paying attention.<br />
Subject + to be + not + -ing<br />
Were they playing football or rugby?<br />
To be + subject + ing ?<br />
3. Listen to the recording again and find two more examples of negative<br />
Past Continuous.<br />
4. Check all the exercises you have done in the lesson and write two<br />
questions using the Past Continuous.<br />
10 Complete this chart with examples of the different forms.<br />
Affirmative<br />
I was walking down<br />
the street.<br />
Negative<br />
They were not<br />
having dinner.<br />
Interrogative<br />
Was she speaking<br />
to me?<br />
11<br />
Complete these short dialogues with a question referring to the part in bold.<br />
a. A: ______________________________________?<br />
B: I was walking down the path in the forest.<br />
b. A: ______________________________________?<br />
B: The strange creature was standing.<br />
c. A: ______________________________________?<br />
B: Clark was cooking lunch in the camp.<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
63
64<br />
UNIT 2<br />
12 Match the words in A with their synonym in B.<br />
A<br />
B<br />
· aircraft · creature · huge · observe · scared<br />
· aeroplane · beast · frightened · immense · watch<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
13 Jill is telling her friend Anne about her strange experience in the<br />
forest. Complete the conversation and then check with the recording.<br />
Anne: ____________________________________?<br />
Jill: I think it was more than two metres tall.<br />
Anne: ____________________________________?<br />
Jill: No, I believe it wasn't human.<br />
Anne: ____________________________________?<br />
Jill: In my opinion, it was the Sasquatch.<br />
14<br />
Listen and practise the conversation with your partner, taking turns to<br />
be Anne and Jill. Role play it in front of the class.<br />
15 Match the sentences that have the same or similar meanings.<br />
a. I saw it with my own eyes i. Their technology is more<br />
modern than ours.<br />
b. They are more technically<br />
advanced than we are.<br />
ii. It sped up and left.<br />
c. It accelerated and disappeared. iii. Their mission was pacific.<br />
d. Their intentions were peaceful. iv. I was an eye-witness.<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
16 Put the words in the correct order to write sentences in your notebook.<br />
The first word in the sentences is highlighted (10 points)<br />
a. were to get They out of the trying plane.<br />
b. author was The signing for autographs her fans.<br />
c. was his Brendan brother with helping homework, his.<br />
d. you talking moment on the Were phone a ago?<br />
e. the parents were Sarah's getting for trip ready.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
0 - 3<br />
Review the lesson<br />
4 - 6<br />
Quite good<br />
7 - 10<br />
Excellent
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
17 Below there are four different instruments we use for measuring things.<br />
Write sentences to indicate what we measure with them.<br />
Example: A thermometer is an instrument for measuring temperatures.<br />
Scales A calendar<br />
A clock A ruler<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Listening<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
65
1<br />
2<br />
66<br />
Luciana is preparing a programme for an important Australian visitor coming to Chile next month. She<br />
wants the programme to be a mixture of business and pleasure. Look at the list of possible activities<br />
and how long they might take. Write sentences about them in your notebook. Use may, might, maybe,<br />
it is possible, and possibly.<br />
Example: First, our guest might meet Chilean politicians in Valparaíso. The meeting might last 2 hours /<br />
The duration of the meeting might be 2 hours.<br />
Activity Duration<br />
Meeting with members of congress in Valparaíso 2 hours<br />
Seafood lunch in the port 1 hour<br />
Go up the hills in a cable car 30 minutes<br />
Stay one night in Viña del Mar 1 night<br />
Short swim in the Pacific Ocean 20 minutes<br />
Meet Minister of Education at La Moneda Palace 40 minutes<br />
Visit Mercado Central and have lunch there 1.5 hours<br />
Afternoon meeting at a municipal school 45 minutes<br />
Visit Bellavista area 30 minutes<br />
Now match the sentences you wrote with the pictures below.<br />
1 2<br />
3 4<br />
UNIT 2
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
You are Luciana's boss and you are evaluating the programme she is proposing. Offer your personal<br />
point of view / opinion about it. Use the expressions in the box.<br />
Read the final version of the guest's programme and answer the questions below.<br />
Day 1<br />
· From my point of view … · I believe that …. · In my opinion….<br />
· I think that… · According to ….<br />
10.00 Meeting with Chilean<br />
politicians<br />
13.00 Lunch at "Donde Pancho"<br />
in Valparaíso<br />
15.00 Cable car ride to Cerro<br />
Placeres<br />
Day 2<br />
9.00 Meeting with Minister of<br />
Education<br />
10.00 Visit Mercado Central<br />
12.00 Lunch in Bellavista<br />
16.00 Talk to secondary school<br />
students about education<br />
in Chile<br />
a. What was the guest doing at 11 o'clock on the first day of the programme?<br />
b. Was he having lunch or swimming in the ocean at 13.00?<br />
c. What was he doing at 15.00 on the first day?<br />
d. What was he doing in the morning of the second day?<br />
e. Was he having lunch or talking to students at 12.30 on the second day?<br />
Invent two more questions about the programme. Ask and answer them in your group.<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
67
READING - SAN PEDRO DE ATACAMA<br />
68<br />
San Pedro de Atacama<br />
AN ABSOLUTE MUST<br />
Accommodation<br />
Whatever you might need - we have it! Maybe you want to stay in a<br />
hotel or you might prefer a hostel. Or maybe you'd love to get one of<br />
the cabins.<br />
Hotels<br />
Right in the centre of San Pedro de Atacama. This is the best choice for<br />
a tourist who visits alone or in small groups. The rooms are single,<br />
double and twin and besides, we also have triple rooms for small<br />
families. All rooms have a private bath and we also include buffet<br />
breakfast. Our staff who speak several languages can take you on a<br />
tour of the nearby geysers.<br />
Hostels<br />
Quite near the centre of the town. This is the best choice for group<br />
tourism and people on a budget. You may choose one of the several<br />
options we have on offer, starting from single rooms to rooms that<br />
accommodate up to six people. Single rooms have a private bath but<br />
the multiple guest rooms share a bathroom located in the corridor.<br />
Cabins<br />
Located 7 km from San Pedro de Atacama and 2 km from Tulor<br />
Village, the cabins are in the beautiful Ayllu de Coyo oasis, surrounded<br />
by native trees. The owners, native to San Pedro, offer a selection of<br />
cabins each with a double room, a private bath, a fully equipped<br />
kitchen and a barbecue.<br />
UNIT 2<br />
Comments from<br />
previous<br />
visitors<br />
John, Washington<br />
I stayed in San<br />
Pedro for two days.<br />
I had a wonderful<br />
time! The people<br />
we met during our<br />
stay were friendly<br />
and helpful.<br />
Stella, Marseille,<br />
My mother stayed<br />
in one of the cabins<br />
for seven days.<br />
According to her<br />
they were clean<br />
and comfortable.<br />
Besides, she loved<br />
the people who<br />
worked there.<br />
Source. www.sanpedrochile.com
1<br />
2<br />
Read the brochure and choose the best icon for each type of accommodation.<br />
a. _____________ b. _____________ c. _____________<br />
Tick the correct column.<br />
a. Located outside San Pedro<br />
b. Best for small groups or individual tourists<br />
c. Breakfast service included<br />
d. With a barbecue<br />
e. Great for bigger groups<br />
f. Located right in the middle of town<br />
3 Which tourist, John, Stella or both?<br />
a. ________ is / are speaking about their personal experience.<br />
b. ________ is / are from France?<br />
c. ________ think / thinks the people of San Pedro are great.<br />
d. ________ had a wonderful time.<br />
LISTENING - THE WEATHER REPORT<br />
4 Listen to the recording and choose the best option.<br />
a. The recording is a radio / TV programme<br />
b. The report is from the local government /<br />
National Weather Service.<br />
c. The people in the affected areas can go back to<br />
/ need to leave their homes.<br />
d. The storm changed intensity from F0 to F2 / F2<br />
to F0.<br />
Hotel Hostel Cabin<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
3 pts.<br />
6 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
69
LANGUAGE<br />
70<br />
5 Match the times in column A with the events in column B.<br />
A B<br />
5.30 to 6.00 p.m. Data on rainfall was collected.<br />
8.30 p.m. People can tune in to another programme.<br />
9 p.m. The broadcast is transmitted to the public.<br />
9.30 p.m. The storm changed direction.<br />
6 Say or tell? Watch out for the correct form of the verb.<br />
a. So, do you want to come or not? What do you ________?<br />
b. John, it's necessary to ________ the truth.<br />
c. They ________ me to wait.<br />
7 Complete these short dialogues with a question corresponding to the information in bold.<br />
a. A: __________________________________?<br />
B: Miss Jefferson was correcting our English tests.<br />
b. A: __________________________________?<br />
B: Dennis was sitting in the living room.<br />
c. A: __________________________________?<br />
B: The boy was carrying a heavy bag.<br />
d. A: __________________________________?<br />
B: She was crying because she felt lonely.<br />
8 Complete the following sentences using the Past Continuous tense of the verb in brackets.<br />
a. She looked up at the sky to see if a storm _____________________. (come)<br />
b. I tried to phone you all day yesterday. What _____________________? (do)<br />
c. The twister _____________________ in the direction of Claire County. (move)<br />
d. Amy________a nice dress when we saw her. (wear)<br />
9 Re-write the sentences using might or may.<br />
a. Maybe they will come to our party.<br />
b. It's possible the twister will change direction.<br />
c. Maybe it is Peter - at least he looks very similar.<br />
d. It‘s possible that you will pass the exam.<br />
WRITING<br />
10 Write a short weather report for your area. Use words such as wind, temperature, rain,<br />
humidity, etc.<br />
UNIT 2<br />
4 pts.<br />
3 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
6 pts.
SPEAKING<br />
11 Look at the pictures and express your opinion / point of view.<br />
6 pts.<br />
1 2 3<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
0 - 15<br />
Not too good<br />
FINAL CHECK ✔ ✔<br />
Choose one alternative according to your performance.<br />
Speaking<br />
· I use English structures correctly.<br />
· I use varied and correct vocabulary.<br />
· Others can understand me.<br />
Writing<br />
· My writing is coherent and follows the central idea.<br />
· I use the correct sentence formation and sentence structure<br />
· I use the correct spelling, punctuation, capitalisation and format.<br />
Reading<br />
· I am aware of the differences in tenses, gender and number.<br />
· I identify the main idea and understand the text as a whole.<br />
· I can locate details and look for specific information.<br />
Listening<br />
· I can get the general idea.<br />
· I understand the details and identify speakers.<br />
· I identify the source of listening and recognise the format<br />
Group work<br />
· I share my ideas with the group<br />
· I listen to and respect my partners' points of view<br />
· I help solve problems and contribute with relevant information<br />
16 - 32<br />
Acceptable<br />
Always<br />
Nearly Always<br />
Sometimes<br />
Never<br />
33 - 48<br />
Great!<br />
Use this clue to work out your score<br />
Never = 0<br />
Sometimes = 1<br />
Nearly Always = 2<br />
Always = 3<br />
If you get:<br />
0 - 10 = Watch out! You must look back<br />
and review the whole unit. Ask your<br />
teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
11 - 22 = Not too bad, but there are<br />
areas you still have problems with.<br />
Identify those areas and ask your<br />
teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
23 - 34 = You are doing fine, but you<br />
can certainly do better. Get together<br />
with a classmate and review your weak<br />
points.<br />
35 - 45 = Congratulations! Great<br />
progress - you may look ahead to the<br />
new unit and help your classmates who<br />
need to review.<br />
HOW STRANGE! HOW WONDERFUL!<br />
Total<br />
48 pts.<br />
71
72<br />
IN THIS UNIT YOU WILL LEARN TO:<br />
Reading: Match written and visual clues / Summarise texts<br />
/ Find specific information<br />
Listening: Match visual and spoken information / Find<br />
specific information / Discriminate between similar sounds<br />
Production: Talk about food preferences / Express opinions<br />
and ideas about eating out / Talk about actions in the past<br />
using the Past Continuous tense<br />
Functions: Expressing quantities / Expressing preferences /<br />
Expressing thanks and complaints<br />
YOU WILL USE THE FOLLOWING TEXT TYPES:<br />
Reading: A brochure / An interview<br />
Listening: Restaurant reviews / A tale<br />
YOU WILL ALSO LEARN:<br />
Grammar: The Past Continuous tense / some / any / much /many /<br />
a little / a few / Relative pronouns that, which, who, where, when<br />
Vocabulary: Words related to healthy eating habits, ingredients<br />
and eating out<br />
YOU WILL PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THESE VALUES:<br />
The importance of a healthy diet
SET UP<br />
1<br />
Can you guess the fruit and vegetables? Which ones do you like/prefer?<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
5 6 7 8<br />
2<br />
Copy the pyramid into your notebook and place the foods we should eat little of at the top and the<br />
foods we should eat a lot of at the bottom. Compare your answers with the food pyramid on page 97.<br />
· apples · bread · butter · cake<br />
· carrots · cereal · cheese<br />
· cherries · chicken · chocolate<br />
· crisps · eggs · fish · ice-cream<br />
· lettuce · milk · oil · pasta<br />
· peppers · plums · potatoes<br />
· red meat · rice · sweets · yoghurt<br />
73
Mind<br />
74<br />
STAYING HEALTHY - KEEPING FIT<br />
READING<br />
UNIT 3<br />
T ea s er<br />
Vitamins and minerals are<br />
substances that are found in<br />
foods we eat. Our bodies<br />
need them to work properly,<br />
so that we grow and<br />
develop just like we should.<br />
When it comes to vitamins,<br />
each one has a special role<br />
to play. For example:<br />
• Vitamin D in milk helps our<br />
bones.<br />
• Vitamin A in carrots helps<br />
us see at night.<br />
• Vitamin C in oranges helps<br />
our body heal if we get a<br />
cut.<br />
• B vitamins in leafy green<br />
vegetables help our body<br />
make protein and energy.<br />
1<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
The Fruit Federation<br />
organised a competition for<br />
the most romantic<br />
fruit ever.<br />
Lesson 1<br />
Put the words in the box under these headings. Which words sound or<br />
look similar in Spanish?<br />
Fruit Vegetable Meat, fish and seafood Others<br />
· protein · vitamin · banana · lettuce · garlic · sweets<br />
· chicken · salmon · cereal · celery · peanut butter<br />
· biscuits · chips · meat · carbohydrates · sugar · salt<br />
· melon · prawn · strawberry · iron · raisin<br />
2 Answer the questions and compare your answers with another student.<br />
a. Do you prefer bananas or strawberries?<br />
b. Would you rather have chicken or meat?<br />
c. Which do you like better: cookies or candy?<br />
d. Which is your favourite vegetable?<br />
e. Would you rather eat something sweet or salty?<br />
3<br />
The Passion<br />
fruit!<br />
And? Who was<br />
the winner?<br />
Which words from Exercise 1 would you expect to find in a brochure<br />
about healthy eating?
HOW TO GROW HEALTHY<br />
Do you want to stay healthy? I'm sure you do.<br />
This brochure offers you tips on how<br />
to stay healthy and keep fit.<br />
Tip 1<br />
First of all, you should get<br />
enough sleep for a young<br />
person who needs lots of<br />
energy in the morning.<br />
Next, get some good<br />
breakfast. Breakfast is a meal that fills your<br />
"empty tank" after a long night without food and<br />
it can help you do better in school. You can eat<br />
easy-to prepare breakfasts that include cold cereal<br />
with fruit and low-fat milk, whole-wheat toast,<br />
yoghurt with fruit, or an egg sandwich.<br />
Tip 2<br />
Would you rather take a bus<br />
or ask your parents to drive<br />
you to school? But if your<br />
school is not too far why<br />
don't you invite a group of<br />
friends who can all walk with you when you go to<br />
school? It can be fun talking along the way.<br />
Tip 3<br />
What's your favourite snack:<br />
chocolate or cookies? If you snack<br />
all the time on salty crisps or<br />
sugary cookies it's not the right<br />
kind of food in the middle of the<br />
morning. Choose snacks that<br />
come from different food groups<br />
which may be a glass of low-fat<br />
milk, an apple or celery sticks with peanut butter<br />
and raisins, or some dry cereal. If you eat smart at<br />
most meals then cookies, chips and candy are OK<br />
for occasional snacking.<br />
Source: The Internacional Food Information<br />
Council<br />
Washington D.C., U.S.A.<br />
Tip 4<br />
Do you prefer exercising or<br />
sitting in front of a TV? Would<br />
you rather go for a bike ride or<br />
read a book? Vigorous work-out<br />
is good for you because when<br />
you breathe hard your heart works better, you have<br />
more energy and you look and feel your best. Start<br />
with warm-up exercises that stretch your muscles<br />
and include 20 minutes of aerobic activity, such as<br />
running or dancing. Do it in a gym or in the park,<br />
where you can also meet your friends.<br />
Tip 5<br />
You don't have to give up foods<br />
like hamburgers, and ice cream<br />
to eat healthy. But choose the<br />
ones you like the best and be<br />
smart about how often and how<br />
much you healthily. Your body needs nutrients,<br />
which are products such as protein, carbohydrates,<br />
fat and many different vitamins and minerals such<br />
as vitamins C and A, iron and calcium from a<br />
variety of foods. You can talk to a nutritionist who<br />
can tell you about different types of food.<br />
Tip 6<br />
Your dad is probably sitting<br />
in front of the TV and maybe<br />
your mum is reading a paper.<br />
Come on, mum and dad!<br />
Let's get going because being<br />
active is much more fun with friends or family.<br />
People who are active live longer and happier lives.<br />
Tip 7<br />
A healthy eating style is like a<br />
puzzle with many parts. Each<br />
part is different. There are foods<br />
that have more fat, sugar or salt<br />
while others have more vitamins<br />
or fibre. Eat a little of all these foods because what<br />
makes a diet good or bad is how the foods fit<br />
together. Balancing your choices is important.<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
75
76<br />
UNIT 3<br />
4<br />
Read the brochure and check your predictions in Exercise 3.<br />
5 Read the brochure again and give each tip a title.<br />
a. Get Moving! b. Start your day with breakfast.<br />
c. Balance your food choices. d. Get fit with friends or family.<br />
e. Snack Smart. f. Work up a sweat.<br />
g. Foods aren't good or bad.<br />
6<br />
Match the pictures with the tips.<br />
1<br />
4 5 6 7<br />
7 Read the brochure again and summarise each tip in one or two sentences.<br />
Example: Tip 1 tells us about the importance of breakfast and how it helps<br />
us prepare for the day.<br />
8 Answer the questions.<br />
a. Why is it important to eat breakfast?<br />
b. Who can you invite to walk to school with you?<br />
c. What kind of nutrients does your body need?<br />
9<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
2 3<br />
Your friend Gloria is asking you about your food preferences. Answer<br />
her questions.<br />
Gloria: Which do you prefer, fish or chicken?<br />
You: ______________________________________________________<br />
Gloria: So do I. But do you like fried or roast chicken more?<br />
You: ______________________________________________________<br />
Gloria: And would you rather eat pizza or a salad?<br />
You: ______________________________________________________<br />
Gloria: Me too but it's not very healthy. And which do you like better: fizzy<br />
drinks or juice?<br />
You: ______________________________________________________
10<br />
Listen to the recording and practise the dialogue with a partner. Role<br />
play the dialogue in front of the class.<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Relative pronouns which / that / who / when / where<br />
1. Read the sentences from the text:<br />
a. People who are active live longer and happier lives.<br />
b. Invite a group of friends who can all walk with you when you go to<br />
school.<br />
c. There are foods that have more fat, sugar or salt while others have<br />
more vitamins or fibre.<br />
d. Do it in a gym or in the park, where you can also meet your friends.<br />
e. Your body needs nutrients which are products such as protein,<br />
carbohydrates, fat and many different vitamins.<br />
2. What do you notice about the sentences above? When referring to a<br />
place, thing, animal or idea mentioned before as a subject of a<br />
sentence, we use relative pronouns that or which.<br />
3. When referring to people mentioned before as a subject of a sentence,<br />
we use the relative pronouns that or who.<br />
We CANNOT use which when referring to people in similar sentences.<br />
4. When referring to time we use when and when referring to a place we<br />
use where.<br />
5. Go back to the text and copy all the sentences that contain relative<br />
pronouns. Can you understand them better now?<br />
11<br />
Look at the advice a nutritionist gave a teenager and complete using that,<br />
which, who, when, where.<br />
You're a typical teenager with parents _____________ always talk to you<br />
about what you eat, how you eat and when you eat. Try to understand<br />
them - they are worried about your diet, _____________ may not be too<br />
healthy. Your body is growing and it needs certain nutrients ____________<br />
can be found in some foods. One of the most important ingredients in your<br />
diet is protein, _____________ is a primary component of our muscles,<br />
hair, skin, eyes, and internal organs, especially the heart and brain. You<br />
need to feed your brain _____________ helps you think and solve<br />
problems so try to include some protein in what you eat. Then come the<br />
carbohydrates _____________ are our main source of energy. The people<br />
_____________ can tell you what and how much to eat are your doctor<br />
and maybe your school nurse. They can also tell you _____________ you<br />
can find more information.<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
77
78<br />
A bakery is a place where<br />
____________________<br />
UNIT 3<br />
12 Look at the pictures and finish the captions under each one.<br />
A chef is a person who<br />
____________________<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
13 Read the information on the left and match it with that on the right. (10 points)<br />
A doctor is a person can be found in certain foods.<br />
you see when<br />
Your body needs nutrients that you are not feeling very well<br />
Francisca is a school bus gives you energy for the day.<br />
driver who<br />
Catalina is a computer drives a big yellow bus.<br />
engineer who<br />
Breakfast is a meal that is preparing a new<br />
software for schools.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
Sushi is a type of food<br />
which _______________<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
I prefer snacks that<br />
____________________<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
14 Today Chef Paolo Bolognese is preparing a special pasta dish. Complete<br />
this paragraph using the words and expressions in the box.<br />
· be boiling · drain · hot water · in olive oil · metal pot<br />
· mushrooms · Parmesan cheese · pasta · sauce<br />
First, you need a ___________ which you fill with ___________. Put the<br />
___________ into the water, which must ___________. Prepare the<br />
___________: slice some fresh ___________, fry them for two minutes<br />
in ___________ and add cream. When the pasta is 'al dente' __________<br />
it and mix it with the sauce. Sprinkle ___________ on top.
PLAY IT<br />
Five teens are shopping and each one is choosing one product. Use the clues to guess<br />
which person is buying which product. Copy the chart into your notebook, write the name<br />
of the product and tick the right column. Who can do this the fastest in your group?<br />
a. Jenny is a strict vegetarian and she does not eat any meat, fish or poultry. Additionally,<br />
her favourite colour is red so she's getting this vegetable which is an intense red and is<br />
often used in salads.<br />
b. Jeremy has a sweet tooth and although his mum says he should eat more fruit, Jeremy<br />
ignores her advice and is buying a product made of flour, sugar, cream and jam.<br />
c. Charlene is an athlete and she has just come back from a cross-country race. She is very<br />
thirsty. She doesn't like soft drinks so she's buying this product that is generally made<br />
from fruit.<br />
d. Gemma's mother is organising a barbecue for Gemma's dad. Lots of guests are coming<br />
and they will eat salads and this grilled product.<br />
e. Mike is going for a picnic tomorrow and he wants to take something that he can pack<br />
easily and eat without using a plate. He is planning to put some cheese and ham on it.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
Jenny<br />
Jeremy<br />
Charlene<br />
Gemma<br />
Mike<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
79
80<br />
EDIBLE ART<br />
LISTENING<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
We use many food words in<br />
everyday expressions. Here<br />
are a few. Can you guess<br />
their meaning from the<br />
context?<br />
a. This baby is so sweet and<br />
beautiful. She's such a<br />
cutie pie!<br />
b. If I can't solve this maths<br />
problem I think I will go<br />
bananas!<br />
c. I will tell you a secret but<br />
you must promise not to<br />
spill the beans.<br />
d. Do you think that kayaking<br />
is hard? On the contrary, I<br />
think it's a piece of cake.<br />
e. Do you like salsa? No, it's<br />
not really my cup of tea.<br />
a. The baby is nice and<br />
sweet.<br />
b. I think I will go crazy.<br />
c. Not to tell anyone.<br />
d. It is vary easy.<br />
e. I do not like it.<br />
UNIT 3<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Lesson 2<br />
Look at the food art pictures. What types of food can you identify in each?<br />
Check with another student.<br />
1 2 3<br />
Read the list of ingredients to prepare Greek salad and answer the<br />
questions.<br />
• Green pepper (1)<br />
• Red onion (1)<br />
• Tomatoes (2)<br />
• Olives (60 grs.)<br />
• Feta cheese (200 grs.)<br />
Ingredients<br />
a. How much lemon juice do you need?<br />
b. How many tomatoes are necessary?<br />
c. How much olive oil is required?<br />
d. How many peppers do you need?<br />
e. What quantity of fresh oregano is necessary?<br />
• Lemon juice (1/4 cup)<br />
• Virgin olive oil (1 tbs.)<br />
• Fresh oregano, salt and<br />
pepper (to taste)<br />
You will hear an interview with Carl Brown, a food artist. Why do you<br />
think he only works with food? Choose one alternative.<br />
a. Because he likes to eat his creations.<br />
b. Because his parents are chefs.<br />
c. Because food is an important part of our lives.<br />
d. Because food is more versatile than paints.
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Listen and check your prediction in exercise 3.<br />
Listen again and tick the foods mentioned by Carl.<br />
________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________<br />
________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________<br />
· broccoli · butter · fish · lettuce · mushrooms<br />
· olives · pasta · pizza · spaghetti · tomatoes<br />
Listen again and check which art forms listed below Carl has used<br />
during his career.<br />
a. collage b. graffiti<br />
c. landscape d. mosaic<br />
e. portrait f. sculpture<br />
g. seascape h. still life<br />
7 Listen once more and choose the best option.<br />
a. When Carl was a child his father<br />
i. had an Italian restaurant. ii. worked in an Italian restaurant.<br />
b. Food is as important as<br />
i. air and water. ii. work and water.<br />
c. When creating his food art Carl can take<br />
i. a few days. ii. seven to ten days.<br />
d. Carl started working with food because he got<br />
i. food art as a Christmas present. ii. a commission from a supermarket.<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
Artists use many different art<br />
forms including:<br />
A portrait - A likeness of a<br />
person that shows the face.<br />
A landscape - A picture that<br />
shows a place such as<br />
mountains, a city or fields.<br />
A collage - a composition of<br />
materials and objects that<br />
include paper, fabric, wood,<br />
glass, etc. pasted over a<br />
surface.<br />
A still life - a painting or a<br />
photograph of inanimate<br />
objects such as fruit or flowers.<br />
A mosaic - a picture or<br />
decorative design made by<br />
placing small coloured<br />
pieces such as stone or tile,<br />
onto a surface.<br />
Graffiti - Drawings or words<br />
written or sprayed on walls.<br />
A seascape - A picture that<br />
shows the sea or the ocean.<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
81
82<br />
UNIT 3<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Countable / uncountable nouns + quantifiers<br />
1. Pay attention to the following sentences from the recording.<br />
a. Use a little cheese.<br />
b. We eat so much food during our lives.<br />
c. A lot of images that I make can take many days to complete.<br />
d. I have a few plans.<br />
2. What kind of word follows the words in bold? Can you count the items?<br />
3. Nouns are divided into countable - which you can count - and<br />
uncountable - which you cannot count.<br />
Countable nouns are things you can count, for example tomatoes, pizzas,<br />
olives, days, etc. They can be used in plural and singular.<br />
Uncountable nouns cannot be counted as units. They are used only in<br />
singular, for example pasta, butter, bread, spaghetti, cheese.<br />
(Careful with the word fish. It is usually used in singular. For example: I<br />
bought some fish for dinner. But when we refer to different species of fish<br />
we can say: The fishes in the lake were salmon, eel, trout and carp.)<br />
4. To indicate quantities related to these items we use many and a few with<br />
countable nouns.<br />
I don't need many tomatoes.<br />
How many olives did you eat?<br />
Give me a few ideas.<br />
We use much and a little with uncountable nouns.<br />
How much food did you buy?<br />
The pizza didn't have much cheese.<br />
I need to drink a little water.<br />
5. We use a lot of for both countable and uncountable nouns.<br />
Add a lot of cheese. Use a lot of tomatoes.<br />
6. Classify all the food you can find on pages 80 and 81 into countable and<br />
8<br />
Countable or<br />
uncountable? Identify<br />
the foods in the fridge<br />
as countable or<br />
uncountable.
9<br />
Complete these sentences using much, many, a few, a little and a lot of.<br />
a. Holland is a country with only __________ mountains.<br />
b. I don't like __________ salt in my soup.<br />
c. It's very sad but in Africa children have __________ food to eat.<br />
d. How much sugar do you want in your tea? Only __________, please<br />
10 Ask questions about the parts in bold using how much or how many.<br />
The big day is finally here. We are going on a trip to the lake. We are going for<br />
5 days. The tickets cost 2,500 pesos each. Two of our classmates are not<br />
going because they have the flu. We are not taking a lot of luggage - just one<br />
backpack each - because the weather is nice so we don't need many clothes.<br />
People say that the level of water in the lake is very low because it is so hot.<br />
We must protect ourselves from the sun and use a lot of sun block.<br />
11 Re-write these sentences in your notebook using a little / a few<br />
Example: I don't need much money = I need a little money.<br />
a. I don't have many friends.<br />
b. This exercise doesn't take much time.<br />
c. There wasn't much rain in Chile last year.<br />
d. You don't need to use much meat for the recipe.<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
12 Complete the second part of the conversation between the reporter and<br />
food artist Carl Brown. Choose expressions and words from the box.<br />
Check with the recording.<br />
· a few · a lot of · how much · landscape<br />
· many · picture · portrait · spill the beans<br />
Reporter: So, what kind of _________ is the Mona Lisa?<br />
Carl: It's a _________ because it shows the face of a person.<br />
Reporter: _________ pasta do you need to make it?<br />
Carl: It's big so I need _________ pasta shapes.<br />
Reporter: Do you have any other plans apart from the Mona Lisa?<br />
Carl: It's still a secret. If I tell you, you can't _________.<br />
Reporter: I promise.<br />
Carl: I am planning to make a huge _________ of New York with<br />
lentils, peas, nuts and _________ other seeds for a very<br />
important client.<br />
Reporter: Will you be working alone?<br />
Carl: No, I will need _________ helpers to complete it.<br />
13 Listen to the completed conversation. Practise it with a partner and<br />
then role play it in front of the class.<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
83
84<br />
UNIT 3<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
14 Look at the ingredients for a lasagne and ask questions about the<br />
quantities. (10 points)<br />
a. _____________ dry lasagne do you need?<br />
b. _____________ spoonfuls of oil do you need?<br />
c. _____________ cheese is needed?<br />
d. _____________ cups of chopped onion will you use?<br />
e. _____________ garlic cloves are needed?<br />
f. _____________ meat do you need?<br />
g. _____________ tomatoes will you put in the lasagne?<br />
h. _____________ basil leaves are required?<br />
i. _____________ tomato sauce is needed?<br />
j. _____________ cups of cream will you use?<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
• 200 grams of dry lasagne<br />
• 1 tablespoon of olive oil<br />
• 250 grams mozzarella cheese<br />
• 1/2 cup chopped onion<br />
• 2 cloves garlic, minced<br />
• 1/2 kilo of meat<br />
• 2 large tomatoes<br />
• 1 basil leaf<br />
• 1 cup of tomato sauce<br />
• 1/2 cup of cream<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
15 Here is another picture by food artist Carl Brown. Describe it and name all<br />
the types of food he used.
PLAY IT<br />
Find the names of these foods in the Word Search Puzzle. The words<br />
may go in any direction.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
A F B R E V B N M A F U L<br />
P U S N P E S T V S E S L<br />
E C I R A G G B R E A D S<br />
S R R N S E R S R E R M E<br />
E L S A T T L N P I A I E<br />
E E I M A A I O U L F L S<br />
V C E O E B U U R T S K E<br />
G A H R L L G T R E S R S<br />
H T E E T E M R U F Y T S<br />
S C T R E S T U H I A M S<br />
I E Y T E S E G I F E U E<br />
F T E G G S E O E A T F S<br />
S T E E W S A Y T L F I R<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
85
86<br />
EATING OUT<br />
READING<br />
UNIT 3<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
1 Match the titles (a. - d.) with the cookery books (1 - 4).<br />
a. “Fast Food - Good Food”<br />
b. “Healthy Food for your Dog”<br />
c. “Making Faces …Edible”<br />
d. “One Hundred and Fifty Ways to Cook Fish”<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
2 Where can you find restaurant reviews?<br />
a. In cookery books. b. In newspapers.<br />
c. In magazines. d. In television programmes.<br />
Lesson 3<br />
3 Read this conversation and guess what the two people are planning.<br />
Colleen: So, is 8 p.m. OK?<br />
Larry: Let's make it 8.30.<br />
Colleen: How about the booking?<br />
Larry: I'll phone and check if they have any tables.<br />
Colleen: How far is it? Shall we take a taxi?<br />
Larry: It's near my house; we can walk.<br />
Colleen: Do you think they have any food I'm going to like?<br />
Larry: Relax! They have local and international cuisine.<br />
4<br />
You are going to read a review of three new restaurants in Toronto,<br />
Canada. Which of these points do you think are included?<br />
Atmosphere - Is the restaurant clean and well-decorated?<br />
Food - Does the writer like the food?<br />
Guests - What's the writer's opinion of other guests?<br />
Menu Selection - Is the menu varied?<br />
Price - How much is the meal?<br />
Service - Are the waiters and waitresses attentive and fast?
S ome<br />
people say that being a restaurant reviewer is the best<br />
job in the world but sometimes it's not. Visiting The Crazy<br />
THREE NEW RESTAURANTS<br />
The<br />
Crazy Cows<br />
Cows was a disappointing experience. And the decoration was<br />
crazy too - metal seats in repulsive black and white leather and<br />
pictures of cows on the walls. Although I had a booking for a<br />
table for two it took the staff 20 minutes to accommodate me and my partner. "We have too many<br />
guests and not enough waiters," the manager explained. The appetiser arrived half an hour later -<br />
a cold tomato soup with some old bread. When the steak came (well- done, please, I asked) it was<br />
still red and looked uncooked. I asked for some garlic sauce for the meat but they didn't have any!<br />
The experience was too bad to wait for dessert. "Do you have any fresh coffee?" I asked. And guess<br />
what? They didn't have any. But I was really shocked when I received the bill. It was too<br />
expensive. I didn't leave tip and left the restaurant very angry. It was a wasted evening. Take my<br />
suggestion and don't visit The Crazy Cows!<br />
The second restaurant was El Mariscal. It has some potential<br />
because of its great location and an exceptional selection of<br />
ingredients. The food is excellent and the service impeccable,<br />
the staff are friendly, well-presented and very polite. The<br />
decoration is cheerful with lovely photos of the ocean and some<br />
green transparent fish on the wall; the place has a great atmosphere. In general, it was the best<br />
meal I've had for a long time. It was well-cooked and it came very quickly. First of all, I had<br />
mussels with some parmesan cheese. They were delicious and really fresh. And, for the second<br />
course, I chose salmon which came with butter and pepper sauce and some spicy potato purée and<br />
asparagus. Last, I had some lovely dessert - passion fruit mousse and, to top it off, I drank a cup of<br />
strong black coffee. Only one thing was not quite right - they didn't have any artificial sweetener<br />
for coffee - just sugar. The meal was not too expensive either. I would definitely recommend El<br />
Mariscal for a delicious meal.<br />
Café Dolce Vita is a lively and authentic Italian restaurant<br />
with a typical decoration of simple tables covered with<br />
cheerful red tablecloths and pictures of Italian landmarks such<br />
as Rome and Venice. The best thing about the restaurant is the<br />
price! If you order before 7 p.m. you get two dishes for the<br />
price of one - a really good offer if you consider their size. I had<br />
some Pasta Alfredo and my partner had cannelloni with spinach and a little cheese. We had some<br />
tiramisu for dessert - really delicious. The restaurant didn't get full marks because the service was<br />
not very good - the waiter was too slow. But overall, I would recommend the place mainly<br />
because when we finished the food I felt really good and I thought that this is what restaurants<br />
are all about - a good meal.<br />
Sources: adapted from the New Yorker, The Guardian and Time Out<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
87
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
Too and enough are<br />
adverbs used to modify<br />
adjectives and indicate<br />
degree. Too means more<br />
than necessary and it<br />
precedes the adjective.<br />
Enough means sufficient and<br />
it usually follows the<br />
adjective.<br />
He is too old to play this<br />
children's game.<br />
He is old enough to buy a<br />
car.<br />
Enough can also be used<br />
with nouns. In such cases,<br />
enough usually precedes the<br />
word.<br />
I have enough money for the<br />
CD player.<br />
There aren't enough people<br />
for the football team.<br />
In some cases, enough can<br />
stand alone.<br />
I have had enough of this<br />
nonsense<br />
88<br />
Danger<br />
Too is also an adverb that<br />
means also. It is used in<br />
positive sentences to indicate<br />
a coincidence. We place it<br />
at the end of a sentence.<br />
• Jane speaks French. Sam<br />
speaks French too.<br />
• I love chocolate and I love<br />
pizza too.<br />
UNIT 3<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
Read the text again and identify which restaurant each pictures illustrates.<br />
8 Read the reviews again and write the name of the restaurant(s).<br />
a. The writer would recommend _________________________________.<br />
b. He would not recommend ____________________________________.<br />
c. He loved the decoration in ____________________________________.<br />
d. He hated the decoration in ____________________________________.<br />
e. The food was too expensive in _________________________________.<br />
f. The food was good value in ___________________________________.<br />
g. The service was excellent in ___________________________________.<br />
h. The service was not too good in ________________________________.<br />
9<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Read the restaurant reviews and check your predictions in Exercise 4. List<br />
all the elements mentioned. Which ones were not mentioned?<br />
Read the reviews again and complete this chart.<br />
Appetiser<br />
Main course<br />
Dessert<br />
Other<br />
The<br />
Crazy Cows<br />
1 2<br />
Overall, which was the best restaurant in the writer's opinion?<br />
3
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
10 Would you take the writer's recommendations? Which restaurant would<br />
you visit?<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
some / any<br />
1. Read the examples from the texts.<br />
a. I asked for some garlic sauce for the meat but they didn't have any!<br />
b. Do you have any fresh coffee?<br />
c. I had mussels with some parmesan cheese.<br />
d. They didn't have any artificial sweetener.<br />
2. What do you notice about the sentences above and the words in bold?<br />
When do we use some? When do we use any?<br />
We use some in affirmative sentences and any in interrogative and<br />
negative sentences to express a certain amount / an unspecified<br />
quantity of something.<br />
3. Here are more examples:<br />
I have some friends but not many.<br />
You don't need any sugar to make pancakes.<br />
Do you have any ideas for your project?<br />
4. Go back to the text and find four more examples with some and any.<br />
How do they illustrate the explanation in Point 2. above?<br />
11 Look at the picture and answer the questions.<br />
a. Is there any cheese on the table?<br />
b. Are there any lemons?<br />
c. Can you see any bread?<br />
d. Are there any biscuits or sweets?<br />
e. Is there any sugar on the table?<br />
f. Can you see any juice?<br />
12 Complete the sentences using some or any.<br />
a. We have _______ coffee but we don't have _______ milk.<br />
b. You can have _______ chocolate or _______ biscuits but not both.<br />
c. A: Do we have _______ lemon juice or vinegar?<br />
B: Yes, we have _______ vinegar but we don't have _______ lemon juice.<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
89
90<br />
UNIT 3<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
13 Michael is telling Sandra about his visit to a Chinese restaurant.<br />
Complete the conversation using the sentences provided (a. - e.).<br />
Check with the recording.<br />
a. How many dishes did you have?<br />
b. How long does it take to get there?<br />
c. How about dessert? Did you have any?<br />
d. Did you get any fortune cookies?<br />
e. How much was the bill?<br />
Sandra: ____________________________________________________<br />
Michael: It depends, it takes about ten minutes by car or underground and<br />
around 25 minutes if you walk.<br />
Sandra: ____________________________________________________<br />
Michael: We had a starter and the main course.<br />
Sandra: ____________________________________________________<br />
Michael: Yes, and mine said: good luck in your professional life.<br />
Sandra: ____________________________________________________<br />
Michael: No, the meal was so big that we didn't want any dessert.<br />
Sandra: ____________________________________________________<br />
Michael: Not really expensive. We paid ten pounds each, including the tip.<br />
14<br />
Listen to the recording and practise the conversation with a partner.<br />
Role play it in front of the class.<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
15 Complete this conversation with some or any. (10 points)<br />
a. A: Do we have _____________ lemons?<br />
B: No, we don't have _____________. What do you need them for?<br />
b. A: I want to make _____________ lemon pie.<br />
B: There are _____________ bananas. How about making<br />
_____________ banana pie instead?<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
16 Have you ever been to a restaurant? Write a short real or imaginary<br />
restaurant review using the points suggested in Exercise 3.<br />
• Atmosphere • Food<br />
• Guests • Menu selection<br />
• Price • Service<br />
PLAY IT<br />
Some or any?<br />
a. Read all the sentences and decide whether you would use some or<br />
any to fill in the blanks.<br />
b. Play with your partner and take turns to make a bet (10, 20 or 50<br />
points) and say a sentence. If your sentence is correct, you win the<br />
points (+); if it isn't, you lose the points (-)<br />
c. Keep a record of your score as you play.<br />
d. The winner is the player who collects the most points<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
10 20 50<br />
1. Have you got_____posters on your bedroom walls?<br />
2. There are ______ interesting new books in the library.<br />
3. There aren't _____ oranges in the fruit bowl.<br />
4. There is ______ fresh fruit in the fridge.<br />
5. I have _____ new CDs of my favourite band.<br />
6. My brothers and I don't drink ____ alcohol.<br />
7. My best friend doesn't eat ____ meat.<br />
8. There are ____ people at the front door.<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
91
Countable versus<br />
uncountable<br />
Remember that uncountable<br />
nouns (such as some foods)<br />
are always in singular. To use<br />
them in plural you must use<br />
words such as slice, piece,<br />
bit, spoonful,etc.<br />
For example a slice of<br />
bread, a piece of meat, a<br />
spoonful of vinegar.<br />
Mind<br />
92<br />
Danger<br />
LET'S DO IT ALL TOGETHER<br />
LISTENING<br />
UNIT 3<br />
T ea s er<br />
Read these expressions<br />
related to food.<br />
a. Just a spoonful of sugar<br />
makes the medicine go<br />
down. - song from the film<br />
“Mary Poppins”.<br />
b. Take it with a pinch of salt<br />
- an idiom meaning “it<br />
might not be quite true”<br />
c. There is a grain of truth in<br />
it - an idiom meaning<br />
“part of it might be true”.<br />
d. This child is quite a<br />
handful - meaning that the<br />
child is difficult to<br />
manage.<br />
e. The best thing since sliced<br />
bread - meaning a very<br />
good thing.<br />
1<br />
2<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Lesson 4<br />
Look at the pictures and say what can be divided into slices, pieces,<br />
spoonfuls, grains, a pinch, a handful. Ask your teacher to help out with<br />
the vocabulary or use a dictionary.<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
5 6 7 8<br />
Put the sentences in order to create a dialogue with two end results<br />
following the diagram provided.<br />
a. Yes, why not. We could ask people for some money.<br />
b. Then why don't we make a collection and ask everyone to contribute?<br />
c. OK, then you invent something interesting.<br />
d. How about organising a picnic for the whole class?<br />
e. A collection? That's another silly idea.<br />
f. Thanks - you are a good sport. Let's start working then.<br />
g. You always try to impose your ideas on me! And besides we don't have<br />
any money to buy the ingredients.<br />
X asks Z<br />
Z refuses giving<br />
a reason<br />
X tries to<br />
persuade Z<br />
Z agrees Z doesn't agree<br />
X thanks Z X gives up
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
Role play the dialogue with the two different endings.<br />
Which words from the box would you expect to find in a text about<br />
cooking a soup?<br />
Listen and check your predictions in Exercise 4.<br />
6 What is the moral of the story?<br />
a. When people are really hungry they will eat anything.<br />
b. When we work together we can accomplish many things.<br />
c. When someone is smart he or she can cheat people.<br />
7<br />
8<br />
· carrot · delicious · fire · hot · hungry · meat · money<br />
· nutritious · onion · pot · stone · taste · tasty · village<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
How do people express their thanks in the story? List at least three<br />
expressions.<br />
Put the pictures in the order the events happened in the story.<br />
1 2 3<br />
4 5 6<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
93
Clauses are groups of words<br />
which have meaning, but are<br />
often not complete sentences.<br />
Some clauses begin with the<br />
word when.<br />
Examples: when she was a<br />
girl / when I saw him.<br />
Other clauses begin with<br />
while.<br />
Examples: while I was<br />
walking / while she was<br />
sleeping.<br />
When we talk about things<br />
that happened in the past, we<br />
usually use the Simple Past<br />
tense after when; while, which<br />
expresses the idea of "during<br />
that time" is usually followed<br />
by the Past Continuous.<br />
I was cooking when she<br />
came in.<br />
She came in while I was<br />
cooking.<br />
94<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
UNIT 3<br />
9 Listen again and choose the correct option.<br />
a. Can you give me something to eat / some meat?<br />
b. I'm poor / I've poured it myself.<br />
c. Why is there a spoon / a stone in the pot?<br />
d. I'm preparing a delicious stone soup which I'll be happy to show to you<br />
/ to share with you.<br />
e. There is / isn't enough for everybody.<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
The Past Continuous<br />
1. Read these sentences from the text.<br />
a. While she was walking through the centre of the village she saw an<br />
even bigger house.<br />
b. While she was doing this the villagers came out of their houses.<br />
2. Can you notice that one action was interrupted by another action in the<br />
past?<br />
3. We use the Past Continuous to indicate that a longer action in the past was<br />
interrupted. The interruption is usually a shorter action in the Simple Past.<br />
Remember this can be a real interruption or just an interruption in time.<br />
X<br />
Past Present<br />
Future<br />
4. Read some other examples.<br />
a. I was not doing anything when you phoned.<br />
b. What were you doing when the postman came?<br />
c. It started to rain while we were walking on the beach.<br />
5. We can also express parallel actions happening in the past.<br />
Past Present<br />
Future<br />
a. I was studying while he was making dinner.<br />
b. Were you listening while he was talking?<br />
6. Look at the pictures illustrating the story on page 93 again. Can you write<br />
two more sentences about them using the Past Continuous? Can you<br />
identify the two actions in each?
10 Match the two parts of the sentences.<br />
While he was lighting the fire<br />
under the pot,<br />
When he walked into the village,<br />
While the soup was cooking,<br />
While he was talking,<br />
the villagers were closing doors<br />
and windows.<br />
the old man was telling them a<br />
story.<br />
the villagers brought different<br />
vegetables.<br />
they were all standing in line with<br />
plates and bowls.<br />
When he finished cooking, they were all listening attentively.<br />
11 Complete these sentences using the Past Continuous tense.<br />
a. A: What _____________________ when the cars crashed? (do)<br />
B: I ____________________________ out of the window. (look)<br />
b. A: ___________________ the doctor ________________<br />
when the lights went out? (operate)<br />
B: No, he __________________________ the instruments. (put away)<br />
c. A: Did she find her glasses?<br />
B: No, she________________still___________when I left. (look)<br />
d. A: What happened to the Titanic?<br />
B: It struck an iceberg when it ____________ the Atlantic. (cross)<br />
12 Choose one word to complete the sentences.<br />
a. For the recipe you need some flour, milk, eggs and a ____________<br />
of salt.<br />
i. piece ii. slice iii. pinch<br />
b. How do you take your tea? One ____________ of sugar, please.<br />
i. piece ii. spoonful iii. pinch<br />
c. The farmer took a bag of rice and pulled out a few ____________.<br />
i. grains ii. pieces iii. bits<br />
d. There is a ____________ of cheese and a ____________ of ham in the<br />
sandwich.<br />
i. handful ii. slice iii. grain<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
95
96<br />
So what were you<br />
doing yesterday<br />
when I called?<br />
But I called later<br />
on and you were<br />
still not in.<br />
Were you buying<br />
stuff for your<br />
birthday party?<br />
Oh, I see. And why<br />
was your little<br />
brother crying when<br />
I arrived?<br />
UNIT 3<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
13 Use the visual clues to complete the conversation. Check with the<br />
recording.<br />
14 Listen to the recording and practise the dialogue with a partner. Role<br />
play it in front of the class.
FAST CHECK<br />
15 Complete the sentences using when or while. (10 points)<br />
a. She was living in Barcelona __________ her younger sister was born.<br />
b. I was having a shower __________ the phone rang.<br />
c. __________ I was travelling in China I learned a few words in Chinese.<br />
d. I fell asleep __________ I was watching the film.<br />
e. Jonathan was parking his car __________ he heard a crash at the back.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
0 - 3<br />
Review the lesson<br />
4 - 6<br />
Quite good<br />
16 Copy and answer these questions in your notebook.<br />
What were you doing when Barack<br />
Obama became the 44th a<br />
US President?<br />
c<br />
What were you doing when the<br />
latest Chilean Telethon announced<br />
they had reached their goal?<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
7 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
b<br />
What were you doing when Madonna<br />
came to Chile to give some concerts?<br />
d<br />
What were you doing when the<br />
clock struck 12 on New Year's Eve<br />
last year?<br />
17<br />
Ask two more questions like those in Exercise 16 in your group.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
97
1<br />
98<br />
There were ten people at this party. Look at the picture and identify the guests. What were they doing<br />
when Tony took the photo? Follow the example and write sentences in your notebook.<br />
Stella was eating a sandwich while George was holding a drink .<br />
a. Stella was eating a sandwich.<br />
b. George was holding a drink in his left hand.<br />
c. Edna and Robert were dancing.<br />
d. Jimmy was sitting in an armchair.<br />
e. Deborah was standing next to the window.<br />
f. Greg and Isabel were talking.<br />
g. Duncan was opening presents.<br />
2<br />
Answer these questions about the picture with your partner.<br />
a. What was Stella wearing?<br />
b. What do you think George was drinking?<br />
c. Who do you think was enjoying the party?<br />
d. Who do you think was getting bored?<br />
e. Whose birthday was it? How do you know?<br />
UNIT 3
3<br />
4<br />
Complete the instructions in this recipe using a few, a little, a lot of, any,<br />
some.<br />
Mix flour, __________ baking powder and __________ salt. Add the butter (this is where I use my hands by<br />
rubbing the butter into the flour). Add milk gradually, stirring until soft dough is formed. Turn out on slightly<br />
floured board and lightly "knead" for __________ seconds, enough to shape. Roll 1/2 inch thick and cut with<br />
a biscuit cutter. Bake on ungreased sheet in a hot oven for 12-15 minutes. Makes 12 big biscuits or<br />
__________ tiny tea biscuits. Notice that we do not put __________ sugar into the dough, but we add<br />
__________ jam and / or cream at the table. These are great served with tea.<br />
Inspector Dell is investigating a robbery at Mr. Rich's house. A diamond ring worth 30,000 Euros was<br />
stolen! Look at the pictures, and ask and answer the questions. Can you guess what happened to the ring?<br />
Example:<br />
Inspector Dell: Miss Rich, what were you doing at eight o'clock last night when the ring was stolen?<br />
Miss Rich: I was listening to music.<br />
1 2 3<br />
Miss Ruby Rich Mr. Rich<br />
Mrs. Rich<br />
1 2 2<br />
Johnny Rich Judy Hill<br />
Greg Jones<br />
Ingredients:<br />
• 2 cups sifted flour<br />
• 2 tsp. baking powder<br />
• 4 tablespoons butter<br />
• 1/2 tsp. salt<br />
• 3/4 cup milk<br />
(approx.)<br />
• Jam and / or cream<br />
to serve<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
99
READING - EATING OUT THE JAPANESE WAY<br />
100<br />
I. ______________________<br />
Tomoe Sushi is one of New York's high quality sushi<br />
restaurants, if you don't mind waiting in a line for a seat. I<br />
really enjoyed my visit there - the sushi served is delicious<br />
and a great value. We had some great rolls with salmon -<br />
you could really feel they were fresh! Then we ordered a<br />
portion of Trout Roses - 6 pieces. They were fantastic and<br />
the rice was great - it was the right texture and not too<br />
soft. I'm not a great expert at eating with chopsticks so it<br />
took me a while to get the hang of it but once I tried it was<br />
not too difficult. Finally, we had some Japanese green tea<br />
and a few sweet rice cookies.<br />
II. ______________________<br />
Sushi has a very interesting origin and it continues to be a<br />
popular food today. It is made with a combination of<br />
shellfish, cooked or raw fish, vegetables, and rice. Although<br />
sushi is most commonly linked to Japan, it actually began<br />
in China during the 7th Century. When people caught fish<br />
they had to preserve it and the only method was by<br />
fermentation. People cleaned, filleted, and pressed raw fish<br />
between some sea salt and usually put a very heavy stone<br />
on top of it. The fish<br />
stayed this way for<br />
weeks until the cook<br />
removed the stone<br />
and then put on<br />
some type of light<br />
cover. The fish<br />
remained in the salt<br />
layers for a couple of<br />
months until the<br />
fermentation<br />
process was<br />
complete.<br />
UNIT 3<br />
III. _____________________<br />
Tomoe is the kind of place<br />
where decoration doesn't<br />
really matter. It is simple<br />
enough, with a few Japanese<br />
prints; the waiters are<br />
Japanese - all really quick<br />
and polite. And the price was<br />
also right, considering that<br />
the meal was good and<br />
abundant enough.<br />
Adapted from http://www.asianartmall.com/originsofsushi.htm and www.menupages.com
1 Read the text and give one of these headings to each paragraph.<br />
a. The origin of sushi<br />
b. General impressions of decoration and price<br />
c. Arriving at the restaurant<br />
1 pt.<br />
2 Are these statements true or false? Correct two of the false statements.<br />
a. Tomoe Sushi is in Tokyo, Japan.<br />
b. The reviewer ate six pieces of Trout Roses.<br />
c. The reviewer is an expert at eating with chopsticks.<br />
d. Sushi is originally from Japan.<br />
e. At first, people made sushi to preserve fresh fish.<br />
f. The waiters at Tomoe were slow and rude.<br />
LISTENING - WHAT A CHEF HAS TO SAY<br />
3 Listen to the recording once. What type of text is it?<br />
a. A telephone conversation.<br />
b. An interview.<br />
c. A monologue.<br />
4 Listen again and complete these sentences.<br />
a. ________________________________________ when you were growing up?<br />
b. _____________________________________________, my parents always told<br />
me I should be passionate about making a living.<br />
c. While she was upstairs, _____________________________________________<br />
d. When you feed people, _____________________________________________<br />
5 Listen again and number these sentences in the order you hear them.<br />
a. Cooking was natural for me.<br />
b. Can you tell us a funny kitchen incident?<br />
c. The most important thing you give them is love.<br />
d. Finally, after giving me some bread with a little ham<br />
and cheese she told about the dog!<br />
e. A few simple points.<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
8 pts.<br />
1 pts.<br />
5 pts.<br />
5 pts.<br />
101
LANGUAGE<br />
6 Complete the sentences using a relative pronoun.<br />
7<br />
8<br />
102<br />
a. A baker is a professional____________________________________________________<br />
b. An umbrella is an object ___________________________________________________<br />
c. I loved the sandwich ______________________________________________________<br />
Ask questions about the sentences using the words in the box.<br />
a. The village where Zajac grew up is 150 kilometres from the capital.<br />
b. It takes 4 hours to get from my town to Santiago.<br />
c. We need 2 litres of milk to make this big cake.<br />
d. We only have a little time to do this exercise.<br />
Match the two parts of the sentences. Several options are possible.<br />
While she was driving the car her husband was sleeping in his seat.<br />
When she stopped the car her husband was looking at the map<br />
and giving her directions.<br />
While they were looking for the place a policeman came to ask her for her<br />
documents.<br />
When she finally found the place it started to rain.<br />
9 Fill in the spaces with some, any, a few, a little, much or many.<br />
So, how _______ tomatoes do you need to make this salad? The number is not specified but<br />
use _______ red tomatoes and _______ green tomatoes. Then cut _______ onions into pieces<br />
and add _______ to the tomatoes. Keep the rest of the onions for the onion soup we are going<br />
to make later. Finally, add a _______ olive oil and a pinch of salt and the salad is ready.<br />
WRITING<br />
UNIT 3<br />
· How much · How many · How long · How far<br />
3 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
2 pts.<br />
3 pts.<br />
10 Write 4 questions you would ask a professional chef about your favourite recipe.<br />
8 pts.
SPEAKING<br />
11 Complete the conversation between two chefs using the questions provided. Then role<br />
play it with a partner.<br />
a. How much time do we have to cook?<br />
b. How far is the hotel from here?<br />
c. How long is the party going to last?<br />
d. How many people are coming?<br />
Chef A: ___________________________________________________________________<br />
Chef B: About two hours. The guests are coming at around 9 p.m.<br />
Chef A: ___________________________________________________________________<br />
Chef B: Ten, five men and five women.<br />
Chef A: ___________________________________________________________________<br />
Chef B: I'm not sure but I think until midnight.<br />
Chef A: So we will need to book a cab to take us back to the hotel.<br />
Chef B: ___________________________________________________________________<br />
Chef A: Only about 20 blocks.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
0 - 16<br />
Not too good<br />
FINAL CHECK ✔ ✔<br />
Choose one alternative according to your performance.<br />
Speaking<br />
· I use English structures correctly.<br />
· I use varied and correct vocabulary.<br />
· Others can understand me.<br />
Writing<br />
· My writing is coherent and follows the central idea.<br />
· I use the correct sentence formation and sentence structure<br />
· I use the correct spelling, punctuation, capitalisation and format.<br />
Reading<br />
· I am aware of the differences in tenses, gender and number.<br />
· I identify the main idea and understand the text as a whole.<br />
· I can locate details and look for specific information.<br />
Listening<br />
· I can get the general idea.<br />
· I understand the details and identify speakers.<br />
· I identify the source of listening texts and recognise the format<br />
Group work<br />
· I share my ideas with the group<br />
· I listen to and respect my partners' points of view<br />
· I help solve problems and contribute with relevant information<br />
17 - 33<br />
Acceptable<br />
Always<br />
Nearly Always<br />
Sometimes<br />
Never<br />
34 - 48<br />
Great!<br />
Use this clue to work out your<br />
score<br />
Never = 0<br />
Sometimes = 1<br />
Nearly Always = 2<br />
Always = 3<br />
If you get:<br />
0 - 10 = Watch out! You must look<br />
back and review the whole unit. Ask<br />
your teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
11 - 22 = Not too bad, but there are<br />
areas you still have problems with.<br />
Identify those areas and ask your<br />
teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
23 - 34 = You are doing fine, but you<br />
can certainly do better. Get together<br />
with a classmate and review your weak<br />
points.<br />
35 - 45 = Congratulations! Great<br />
progress - you may look ahead to the<br />
new unit and help your classmates<br />
WE ARE WHAT WE EAT<br />
8 pts.<br />
Total<br />
48 pts.<br />
103
104<br />
IN THIS UNIT YOU WILL LEARN TO:<br />
Reading: Summarise a text using questions and / or<br />
headings / Identify type and source of text / Find specific<br />
information through scanning<br />
Listening: Identify the order of events / Match oral and<br />
visual information / Identify specific information<br />
Production: Make and respond to suggestions / Express plans<br />
for the future / Talk about wishes and regrets / Make complaints<br />
Functions: Refer to personal experiences / Express hopes<br />
and disillusion / Express wishes and regrets<br />
YOU WILL USE THE FOLLOWING TEXT TYPES:<br />
Reading: News-based anecdotes / Instructions<br />
Listening: A myth / An interview / An advertisement<br />
YOU WILL ALSO LEARN:<br />
Grammar: Going to to express the future / Wish to express hopes<br />
and desires / The use of would like to<br />
Vocabulary: Make vs. do /Vocabulary related to professions and work /<br />
Words related to giving and following instructions for different machines<br />
YOU WILL PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THESE VALUES:<br />
The importance of doing a job well
SET UP<br />
1<br />
2<br />
Match the professionals (1 - 5) with the situations (6 - 10).<br />
1 2 3 4 5<br />
6 7 8 9 10<br />
In pairs, complete the chart following the example.<br />
Baker<br />
Driver<br />
Electrician<br />
Farmer<br />
Hairdresser<br />
Reporter<br />
Translator<br />
A person who bakes cakes and bread<br />
105
Mind<br />
Guinness World Records is<br />
an annual reference book<br />
which contains an<br />
international collection of<br />
world records, including<br />
human successes and the<br />
extremes of the natural world.<br />
106<br />
Danger<br />
DO IT WELL! MAKE IT BIG!<br />
READING<br />
UNIT 4<br />
T ea s er<br />
We use the verb do<br />
a. when someone performs an<br />
action, activity or task: do a<br />
crossword; do the washing.<br />
b. when referring to work of<br />
any kind: do your work;<br />
do homework.<br />
c. when speaking about<br />
things in general. I am not<br />
doing anything today.<br />
We use the verb make for<br />
constructing, building or<br />
creating: make a dress; make<br />
food, make breakfast. These<br />
activities usually create<br />
something that you can touch.<br />
1<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Lesson 1<br />
Read the adjectives in the box. Can you place them along the line according<br />
to size, starting with the smallest on the left to the biggest on the right?<br />
2 Which sentences below indicate personal experiences? How do you know?<br />
a. I want to thank all our friends and neighbours who helped us create<br />
this scone.<br />
b. All their neighbours and friends were grateful for the experience.<br />
c. I've calculated that if I shoot some 50 balloons I can land on the field<br />
quite safely.<br />
d. Scientists have calculated that if he shoots some 50 balloons he can<br />
land on the field quite calculated safely.<br />
3<br />
· big · diminutive · huge · small<br />
· substantial · tiny · microscopic<br />
Smallest Biggest<br />
You are going to read two texts related to these pictures. What do you<br />
think they are going to be about?<br />
1 2<br />
4 Make or do? Put the verb in the correct form.<br />
a. So, what are you going to _________, a cake or pancakes?<br />
b. Do you know what Sheila is _________ right now?<br />
c. Have you _________ your homework?<br />
d. While Greg is _________ the dishes Susan can _________ breakfast.<br />
You can find all kinds of records online accessing the home page of the book<br />
http://www.guinnessworldrecords.com
GO AHEAD<br />
I. RECORD BREAKING SCONE<br />
A family of bakers is today the<br />
holder of a new record,<br />
creating a colossal scone which<br />
is 700 times bigger than a<br />
typical scone you can buy in<br />
any bakery.<br />
The Hallet family's creation is<br />
going to become the most<br />
important part of the world's<br />
largest tea party organised for<br />
the Torquay Food Festival.<br />
Mrs. Hallet, a baker by<br />
profession and, together with<br />
her family, the creator of the<br />
huge scone, told us today:<br />
“If you want to make a giant<br />
scone you start by collecting<br />
the ingredients; you'll need a<br />
lot! To make a scone similar to<br />
ours you need 13kg of flour,<br />
2.5kg of butter, 9kg of milk,<br />
2kg of sugar, 600g of baking<br />
powder, 120g of salt, 12.5<br />
litres of cream and 20kg of<br />
strawberry jam.”<br />
This is the first time Mrs.<br />
Hallet is making a scone this<br />
size but she says she is going to<br />
keep making enormous scones<br />
in the future.<br />
“As a baker I usually make<br />
bread and cakes. But they are<br />
normal bread and cakes that<br />
you can buy from my shop in<br />
Torquay every day. Our<br />
massive scone is made<br />
according to a 100-year-old<br />
recipe I inherited from my<br />
grandmother who was a farmer<br />
and which I've always wanted<br />
to make. One day, as I was<br />
talking to my family they said:<br />
You've got to make something<br />
really big and unusual. So I said<br />
- I'm going to make a really<br />
enormous scone. And this year,<br />
our town of Torquay is<br />
organising a Food Festival so<br />
we're going to donate this<br />
gigantic scone to the event.<br />
This is an unforgettable<br />
experience for all of us”<br />
Mrs. Hallet also said: “I want<br />
to thank all our friends and<br />
neighbours who helped us<br />
create this scone.”<br />
II. AN UNUSUAL <strong>JO</strong>URNEY<br />
This is a report from our USA<br />
correspondent, Jenny Rush,<br />
who in two days’ time is going<br />
to witness an unusual and<br />
spectacular event.<br />
Ken Crouch, a garage owner,<br />
will make his childhood dream<br />
come true. Ever since Ken read<br />
“The Wizard of Oz” he has<br />
wanted to fly. And this<br />
Monday, he is going to fly<br />
across the blue Oregon sky …<br />
in a chair tied to 150 huge<br />
multi-coloured party balloons.<br />
The chair is going to fly over<br />
the mountains on its 318-km<br />
journey across the desert. If<br />
the weather conditions are<br />
stable Ken will land on a field<br />
where reporters from various<br />
national and international<br />
media are going to interview<br />
him about his personal<br />
experience.<br />
Something that everybody is<br />
asking about and which seems<br />
to be the most difficult part of<br />
the journey is the landing.<br />
Ken explains: “Yes, it's<br />
complicated but someone said:<br />
why don't you take your air<br />
gun with you? So I'm going to<br />
shoot the balloons to let the<br />
air out. I've calculated that if I<br />
shoot 50 balloons I can land on<br />
the field quite safely. I have to<br />
shoot them one by one to get<br />
a soft landing.”<br />
The whole trip across Oregon<br />
is going to take 9 hours to<br />
complete. Ken's wife and his<br />
two teenage sons are going to<br />
follow his adventures overland<br />
in a jeep.<br />
We are not sure how safe<br />
Ken's adventure is but we have<br />
to say it looks like one<br />
colourful journey.<br />
Source: Daily Mail, various editions 2008<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
107
Compare these sentences.<br />
You've got to do it right. ~<br />
You have to do it right.<br />
Both sentences express an<br />
obligation, something that is<br />
needed or necessary. They<br />
can be used interchangeably.<br />
Here are some more<br />
examples.<br />
We've got to hurry up. ~<br />
We have to hurry up.<br />
She's got to study more. ~<br />
She has to study more.<br />
108<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
UNIT 4<br />
5<br />
Read the two texts and check your predictions in Exercise 3.<br />
6 What is the source of the two stories?<br />
a. An encyclopaedia. b. A newspaper.<br />
c. A scientific magazine. d. A website.<br />
7 Why did the protagonists of the two stories decide to do something big?<br />
a. They want to help other people.<br />
b. They are following their dreams.<br />
c. It is a family tradition.<br />
d. They want to break a world record.<br />
8<br />
9<br />
Read the text again and write down what the numbers in this chart refer to.<br />
9<br />
13<br />
100<br />
150<br />
318<br />
700<br />
Which of the ingredients in the pictures are not needed for the giant scone?<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
5 6 7 8<br />
10 Read the stories again. Use the question words below as clues to<br />
summarise them.<br />
Who?<br />
When?<br />
What?<br />
Where?<br />
Why?<br />
Story I Story II
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Going to + infinitive<br />
1. Read these sentences from the text.<br />
a. We are going to donate this gigantic scone to the event.<br />
b. I'm going to make a really enormous scone.<br />
c. In two days’ time Jenny Rush is going to witness an unusual and<br />
spectacular event.<br />
2. What kind of actions do they refer to?<br />
a. Planned actions for the future<br />
b. Unplanned actions in the future.<br />
Going to + infinitive is used to refer to planned actions in the future.<br />
3. Go back to the text. Find and copy all the sentences that refer to<br />
planned actions in the future.<br />
11<br />
Put the verbs in brackets in the correct form to indicate planned future<br />
actions.<br />
a. It _______________ a sunny day tomorrow. (be)<br />
b. They _______________ lunch quite soon. (eat)<br />
c. Sue says she _______________ her snack with me. (share)<br />
d. The school _______________ in the competition this year. (take part)<br />
12 Answer these questions about yourself and your personal experiences.<br />
a. What are you going to do after you finish school?<br />
b. Are you going to see your friends this weekend?<br />
c. When are you going to have your birthday party?<br />
d. Where are you going to go on holiday next year?<br />
13<br />
Go back to the text and find all the words denoting professions or<br />
people‘s activities. Copy them into your notebook using have got and<br />
have to.<br />
14 Re-write the sentences in your notebook using have got to and have to.<br />
Example: It's necessary to use some butter and milk.<br />
You've got to use some butter and milk.<br />
You have to use some butter and milk.<br />
a. Our car is so dirty. It's necessary to wash it.<br />
b. We are late. It's necessary to hurry up.<br />
c. Don't lie. It's necessary to tell the truth.<br />
d. Ken wants to land safely. It's necessary to shoot 50 balloons one by one.<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
One of the most common<br />
suffixes (particles we add to<br />
the end of words to make<br />
new words) is the suffix -er.<br />
It means the doer or maker of<br />
something and is frequently<br />
used with professions: baker,<br />
farmer, teacher, waiter, writer.<br />
Other common suffixes to<br />
indicate professions are -or,<br />
-ist, -ant, and -man/woman:<br />
creator, director, supervisor;<br />
dentist, journalist, scientist;<br />
accountant, assistant,<br />
attendant; barman, fireman,<br />
policewoman.<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
109
110<br />
UNIT 4<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
15 Complete this conversation about plans for the future using the<br />
verbs in brackets. (10 points)<br />
Jack: Have you made up your mind yet?<br />
Bella: Yes, we _________ a picnic. (organise)<br />
Jack: Good idea. How about the food?<br />
Bella: We _________ some simple finger food: sandwiches,<br />
veggie sticks and soft drinks. (buy)<br />
Jack: And the guest list?<br />
Bella: We _________ the whole class and a few teachers. (invite)<br />
Jack: The only problem is transport.<br />
Bella: Greg's mother has a minibus and she _________ us all. (take)<br />
Jack: Well, everything's solved then!<br />
Bella: Oh, no! Look at the clouds, Jack! It looks as if it _________ ! (rain)<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
16<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
Listen to the conversation in Exercise 15 and check your answers.<br />
Then listen, practise and role play the dialogue in front of the class.<br />
17 Complete these summaries of the two stories. Notice that they are in the<br />
first person singular.<br />
Mrs Hallet: I'm a ____________ and I have a little bakery in ____________.<br />
I usually make normal ______________ and ______________,<br />
but this year I want to make a giant ______________<br />
which ______________ going to donate to the Torquay Food<br />
Festival. This ______________ going to be the _____________<br />
scone in the world and I'm ______________ to be in the<br />
Guinness ______________ of Records.<br />
Ken Crouch: I'm a garage ______________, but I've always wanted to<br />
_____________. So I'm going to fly across the _____________<br />
in a chair tied up to lots of huge party ______________. I'm<br />
going to ______________ softly on a field by ______________<br />
the balloons one by one. My ______________ and son<br />
are ______________ to follow my journey overland in<br />
a ______________. After I land I'm going to be interviewed by<br />
national and ______________ journalists.
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
18 Use the pictures below to write the ending to Story II you read in this lesson.<br />
1 2<br />
PLAY IT<br />
a. The table has 10 words related to making the biggest scone in the world.<br />
b. Hop from space to space but only to spaces immediately adjacent to each other to discover<br />
all the words.<br />
c. List them in your notebook.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
oven<br />
chair<br />
butter<br />
bake<br />
flour<br />
travel<br />
baker<br />
balloon<br />
jam<br />
mountains<br />
fly<br />
scone<br />
dream<br />
cream<br />
child<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
desert<br />
milk<br />
sugar<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
air<br />
shoot<br />
111
112<br />
FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS<br />
LISTENING<br />
UNIT 4<br />
1<br />
2<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Lesson 2<br />
Put the instructions in the correct order. Use the pictures to help you.<br />
a. i. Insert the pendrive into the USB drive.<br />
ii. Get your pendrive ready for use.<br />
iii. Locate the USB drive on the computer or laptop.<br />
b. i. Open the microwave.<br />
ii. Prepare the plate with food.<br />
iii. Programme the microwave and close the door.<br />
iv. Do not use any metal objects.<br />
A cause is something that makes something else happen. An effect is<br />
what happens as a result of a cause. Match the cause and the effect<br />
sentences in the table.<br />
Cause<br />
She presses a button on the<br />
microwave.<br />
I dial a number.<br />
Susie turns the taps on.<br />
I put a card into the slot.<br />
George turns the light on.<br />
Effect<br />
John answers the telephone.<br />
Water comes out.<br />
Money comes out.<br />
The room gets brighter.<br />
The machine starts working.
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
Read the mini-dialogues below. Which ones, in your opinion, express<br />
expectations and which ones regret?<br />
a. A: The man says the bus should be here soon.<br />
B: I hope so.<br />
b. A: They don't have any more tickets for the Coldplay concert.<br />
B: Oh, what a pity!<br />
c. A: Hopefully, we can get home before it starts raining.<br />
B: I'm sure we can.<br />
d. A: I'm afraid the plane to Madrid is delayed 5 hours.<br />
B: Oh dear, that's terrible.<br />
Considering the exercises on page 112 and the title of the lesson, what do<br />
you think the listening text will be about?<br />
a. How to use a microwave.<br />
b. How to follow instructions.<br />
c. How to make a phone call.<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Listen and check your predictions in Exercise 4.<br />
Put the pictures in the order you hear the instructions.<br />
1 2 3<br />
4 5 6<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
113
114<br />
UNIT 4<br />
7<br />
8<br />
9<br />
Listen again and put the instructions (a. - f.) in order; then match<br />
them with the pictures in Exercise 6 (1 - 6).<br />
a. Fold the top and bottom of the head away from you.<br />
b. Put the coloured side face down on the table.<br />
c. Fold the corners together and unfold.<br />
d. Draw eyes, a nose and a mouth.<br />
e. Fold the dog's ears down.<br />
f. Fold the paper along the diagonal line.<br />
Listen again. Which of the words in the box does the instructor use to<br />
indicate a sequence of events? Write them in your notebook.<br />
What's the effect? Listen again and complete this chart.<br />
10 Listen again and complete these sentences.<br />
a. I hope that you are all ________________________________________.<br />
b. Can you tell us about ________________________________________?<br />
c. I'm going to show ___________________________________________.<br />
11 Listen again and answer the questions.<br />
a. What is the name of the art of paper folding?<br />
b. Where is it originally from?<br />
c. Who took this art to Japan?<br />
d. What is the plan for the first class?<br />
12<br />
· after that · finally · first · last · next · now<br />
· second · then · to begin with<br />
Cause<br />
If you put the coloured side face<br />
down on the table<br />
We're going to fold the paper along<br />
the diagonal line<br />
Fold the corners together and<br />
unfold<br />
You can draw eyes, a nose and a<br />
mouth.<br />
Effect<br />
Listen once more and check which expressions from Exercise 3 were<br />
used in the listening text.<br />
You can find thousands of How-to instructions on<br />
http://www.ehow.com
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Going to + infinitive (continued)<br />
1. Read these sentences that express plans or intentions.<br />
We're going to travel to Europe. We're going to see lots of old buildings<br />
and museums. (a plan for the future).<br />
I'm going to be a famous scientist when I finish school. (this is my<br />
intention for the future).<br />
2. Read these sentences that express certainty for the future.<br />
Watch out! That tree is going to fall!<br />
Don't worry. I know you are going to pass the exam.<br />
The sky is very dark; it's going to rain tonight.<br />
3. Read these sentences from the recording. Which one expresses a plan<br />
or intention and which one certainty for the future?<br />
a. We are not going to do anything complicated.<br />
b. Careful with the scissors! They are going to fall from the desk!<br />
13 Complete these sentences expressing plans, intentions or certainty. Use<br />
the correct form of the verbs in brackets.<br />
a. A: So, what's the plan for today's lesson?<br />
B: We __________ a landscape using water colours. (paint)<br />
b. Look! The car on your right __________ an accident. (have)<br />
c. A: What __________ in that empty lot? (do)<br />
B: They __________ a big shopping centre. (build)<br />
d. Look at the clouds. I'm sure it __________. (rain)<br />
e. A: __________ your friends at the weekend? (visit)<br />
B: I think I __________ at home. (stay)<br />
f. A: Where __________ Kelly __________ ? (study)<br />
B: She __________ for a scholarship at a British university (apply)<br />
14 Fill in the blanks in this story with last, first, next, second.<br />
Susan's going to make a peanut butter and jelly sandwich. __________, she's<br />
going to put peanut butter on one slice of bread. __________, she's going to<br />
spread jelly on another slice of bread. __________, she's going to put the two<br />
slices of bread together. __________, she's going to eat her sandwich. I'm<br />
sure it is going to be delicious.<br />
Danger<br />
You have probably heard the<br />
expression: I'm gonna …..<br />
I'm gonna do it. Or I'm<br />
gonna come.<br />
It means: I am going to ….<br />
This is a slang expression<br />
some English speakers use.<br />
You should be aware that it<br />
exists but try not to use it,<br />
especially in formal situations.<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
115
116<br />
UNIT 4<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
15 Billy and Joel are talking about Billy's plans for next Saturday.<br />
a. Put the pictures in the order the actions are mentioned in the<br />
conversation.<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
5 6 7 8<br />
b. Complete Billy and Joel‘s conversation and then check with the<br />
recording.<br />
Joel: ______________________________________________?<br />
Billy: Well, first of all I'm going to sleep a lot.<br />
Joel: ______________________________________________?<br />
Billy: Second, I'm going to have a big breakfast!<br />
Joel: ______________________________________________?<br />
Billy: After that, I'm going to watch some TV, read the morning papers, go<br />
for a long walk and then I'm going to have a nice lunch.<br />
Joel: ______________________________________________?<br />
Billy: Next, I'm going to get together with some friends to play cards and<br />
video games.<br />
Joel: ______________________________________________?<br />
Billy: Finally, I'm going to go to a party or a disco and I'm going to dance<br />
all night long.<br />
Joel: I see that your weekend is going to be very busy.<br />
Billy: I hope so!
16 Listen to the recording and practise the conversation with a partner.<br />
Take turns to be Billy and Joel. Role play the conversation in front of the<br />
class, including as much true information about yourself as possible.<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
17 Complete these dialogues with an appropriate question for the<br />
underlined part . (10 points)<br />
a. A: Where _________________________________________________?<br />
B: She is going to travel to Spain.<br />
b. A: What _________________________________________________?<br />
B: She is going to buy a new apartment.<br />
c. A: When _________________________________________________?<br />
B: It's going to snow on Monday.<br />
d. A: Who _________________________________________________?<br />
B: The students are going to ask the teacher to postpone the test.<br />
e. A: Why _________________________________________________?<br />
B: I'm going to organise a party to celebrate my birthday.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
Listening<br />
Speaking<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
18 Choose one of the following objects and write the instructions to use it.<br />
a. A DVD. b. A webcam. c. A food mixer. d. A video recorder.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Writing<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
117
Mind<br />
118<br />
HOLDING THE WORLD ON YOUR SHOULDERS<br />
READING<br />
Lesson 3<br />
UNIT 4<br />
T ea s er<br />
Greek is an Indo-European<br />
language spoken in Greece,<br />
Cyprus and the Middle East.<br />
English has borrowed a<br />
large number of words from<br />
Greek. They can be grouped<br />
into several categories:<br />
Educational and sporting:<br />
gymnasium, mathematics.<br />
Mythology: amazon,<br />
Pegasus.<br />
Social and political:<br />
democracy, demographic.<br />
Terms from Christianity:<br />
Eucharist, catholic.<br />
Theatrical: drama, chorus.<br />
Animals: buffalo, crocodile.<br />
Place names: Egypt, Ethiopia.<br />
The vast majority of Greek<br />
borrowings are scientific<br />
terms: astronomy,<br />
geography, biology,<br />
anthropology, and many,<br />
many others. Can you add<br />
more words to this list?<br />
1<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Match the pictures (1 - 3) with the titles (a. - c.). Do you know any other<br />
Greek myths? Which ones? Tell your classmates.<br />
1 2 3<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
a. "Part-human and part-horse"<br />
b. "Zeus and the gods of Mount Olympus"<br />
c. "The Trojan Horse"<br />
Which Chilean myths do you know? Describe one in your group.<br />
Read the words in the box. Which ones do you think have a positive<br />
connotation, which ones a negative and which ones a neutral<br />
connotation? Use a dictionary if necessary.<br />
· apple · basket · chief · favour · fine · lie<br />
· naive · quiet · smart · terrible · vengeful · weight<br />
Positive<br />
Negative<br />
Neutral<br />
Which words from Exercise 3 would you expect to find in a myth about a<br />
Greek giant?<br />
You can check the origin of a word (its etymology, also Greek origin!) at<br />
the following site: http://www.etymonline.com
I. _________________________<br />
Atlas, a Greek giant, and one of<br />
the firstborn sons of Earth, did<br />
not like the way Zeus and his<br />
friends ruled the world. So one<br />
day he decided to lead a revolt<br />
against the Mount Olympus<br />
gods and take the throne by<br />
force for himself. Zeus, who was<br />
quite vengeful, got very angry<br />
with him. ______. (1) “I wish I<br />
knew what kind of punishment<br />
to give you,” he thought. “I<br />
know! As of now, you're going<br />
to hold the weight of the world<br />
upon your shoulders.” And<br />
from that day on Atlas had to<br />
stand in the middle of the<br />
universe, all alone, holding the<br />
earth on his shoulders.<br />
II. _________________________<br />
One day, the hero Hercules<br />
approached him with an<br />
unusual request.<br />
“Good morning. How are you<br />
doing today?”<br />
Atlas's nose started to itch very<br />
badly. “I wish I could scratch<br />
my nose,” he thought but he<br />
couldn't drop the weight.<br />
“The same as every day. I wish<br />
I were somewhere else but I'm<br />
here. What can I do for you?”<br />
he said aloud to Hercules.<br />
“Can you do me a favour?”<br />
Hercules asked.<br />
“And what would it be? I wish<br />
I could move, but as you can<br />
see I'm stuck here for ever and<br />
ever,” Atlas answered.<br />
“I have some very urgent work<br />
to do as I've got to get the<br />
ATLAS AND HERCULES<br />
Hesperides golden apples. (2)<br />
_____________.”<br />
The Hesperides were<br />
spectacular nymphs who lived<br />
in an orchard guarded by the<br />
terrible hundred-headed<br />
dragon Ladon.<br />
“And?” Atlas asked.<br />
“Well, if you get the apples I'll<br />
hold the earth for you. It's that<br />
simple. So - what do you say?<br />
Do we have a deal?”<br />
Atlas, who was rather naïve,<br />
thought for a while about<br />
making an excuse.<br />
“Hmm, he'll hold the earth for<br />
me if I get him the apples. Fine<br />
and good - but I'm not going to<br />
take the earth back from him!<br />
(3) _____________!”<br />
III. ________________________<br />
So Atlas passed the Earth to<br />
Hercules and set off to get the<br />
golden apples.<br />
(4) _____________ “Got the<br />
apples but I'm not going to take<br />
back the earth,” he laughed.<br />
”You think I'm stupid? All the<br />
time I stood here wishing I<br />
could be somewhere else and<br />
now is my only chance.”<br />
Hercules, who was much smarter<br />
than Atlas, said: “That's OK; I'll<br />
do my best and keep holding this<br />
weight. But why don't we do<br />
something before I'm stuck here<br />
till the end of times? Could you<br />
hold it for a while so that I can<br />
scratch my nose?”<br />
Atlas remembered how he<br />
often wished he could scratch<br />
his nose and couldn't.<br />
Source: The Complete World of Greek Mythology by Richard Buxton<br />
(Hardcover - Jun 28, 2004), published by Thames and Hudson.<br />
“But will you take it back from<br />
me after you scratch your nose?”<br />
“Of course I will. You have my<br />
word of honour,” lied Hercules.<br />
Atlas put down the basket with<br />
apples and took the earth from<br />
Hercules's shoulders.<br />
“In a moment I'm going to be<br />
free like the wind. All the things<br />
I'm going to do! And stupid<br />
Hercules will stay here for<br />
ever,” Atlas thought to himself.<br />
But Hercules picked up the<br />
basket with the apples and<br />
started to walk away.<br />
“Hey, what do you think you're<br />
doing? Aren't you coming<br />
back?” Atlas yelled.<br />
“I wish I could, but I'm terribly<br />
busy right now,” Hercules<br />
answered and kept walking.<br />
“Cheerio!” he shouted and<br />
quietly kept walking<br />
and never<br />
looked back.<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
119
Do you know what a<br />
heading is and what role it<br />
has in a text? How is it<br />
different from a title? While a<br />
title is an identifying name<br />
given to a book, play, film,<br />
musical composition, or other<br />
work or part of work (for<br />
example a chapter) a<br />
heading is usually a line of<br />
text serving to indicate what<br />
the passage below is about.<br />
A title can be a longer line of<br />
text or just one word, for<br />
example "Jaws" or "The<br />
Wonderful Adventures of<br />
Alice in Wonderland", but a<br />
heading is a summary of<br />
what a given text or a piece<br />
of text is about.<br />
120<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
UNIT 4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Read the text and check your predictions in Exercise 4.<br />
Read the text again and choose one heading (a. - d.) for each paragraph<br />
(I - III). There is an extra heading you do not need to use.<br />
a. How Atlas defeated the dragon.<br />
b. Smart Hercules - silly Atlas.<br />
c. Hercules asks for a favour.<br />
d. Atlas's crime and punishment.<br />
Some sentences (a. - d.) have been removed from the paragraphs. Can<br />
you put them back into the corresponding spaces (1) - (4)?<br />
a. In two days he returned with a full basket.<br />
b. It‘s an ideal job for a giant like you.<br />
c. For a long time he was not sure how to punish Atlas.<br />
d. Let him hold it for ever.<br />
8 Look at the expressions in bold in the text. Who do they refer to?<br />
Paragraph I<br />
a. with him<br />
i. Atlas ii. Zeus<br />
Paragraph II<br />
b. who lived<br />
i. the nymphs ii. the dragon<br />
c. from him<br />
i. Atlas ii. Hercules<br />
Paragraph III<br />
d. his nose<br />
i. Atlas’s ii. Hercules<br />
9 What is the author's opinion of the following protagonists?<br />
a. Zeus is<br />
i. unforgiving. ii. kind.<br />
b. Atlas is<br />
i. not very clever. ii. very strong.<br />
c. Hercules is<br />
i. smart. ii. lazy.<br />
d. Hesperides are<br />
i. ugly. ii. pretty.
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
wish<br />
1. Read these sentences from the text.<br />
a. I wish I knew what kind of punishment to give you.<br />
b. I wish I were somewhere else, but I'm here.<br />
c. I wish I could scratch my nose.<br />
2. What do the sentences express?<br />
We use this structure when we would like things to be different from what<br />
they actually are. We use the verb wish to refer to how we'd like things to be<br />
in the present or to talk about how we would like things to be in the future.<br />
3. The general concept is sometimes known as 'wishful thinking' and<br />
often coincides with the use of ojalá in Spanish.<br />
Here are more examples:<br />
I wish you were here.<br />
It's so hot today. I wish we had a cold drink.<br />
4. Notice that we use the Past Tense after the verb wish.<br />
10 Read these extracts from the text and write how Atlas would express<br />
his wishes.<br />
a. So one day he decided to lead a revolt against the Mount Olympus<br />
gods and take the throne by force for himself.<br />
“_________________________________________________________”.<br />
b. And from that day on Atlas had to stand in the middle of the universe,<br />
all alone.<br />
“_________________________________________________________”.<br />
c. He couldn't drop the weight.<br />
“_________________________________________________________”.<br />
11<br />
According to the text, who do you think could ask these questions: Zeus,<br />
Hercules or Atlas?<br />
a. _____________: What are you going to do with the apples?<br />
b. _____________: How am I going to punish you?<br />
c. _____________: So, are you going to help me?<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
121
Examine more expressions<br />
with make and do.<br />
• do one's best<br />
• do good<br />
• do harm<br />
• do a favour<br />
• do business<br />
122<br />
Danger<br />
• make plans<br />
• make an<br />
exception<br />
• make<br />
arrangements<br />
• make a<br />
telephone call<br />
• make a decision<br />
• make a mistake<br />
• make noise<br />
• make money<br />
• make an excuse<br />
• make an effort<br />
UNIT 4<br />
12 Complete these sentences expressing “wishful thinking”.<br />
a. It's so cold! I __________ a coat and gloves. (have)<br />
b. This town is so boring. I __________ in Paris. (live)<br />
c. English is difficult for me. I __________ it better. (understand)<br />
d. I can't reach the top shelf. I __________ taller. (be)<br />
e. I can't help you. I __________ the answer myself. (know)<br />
13<br />
Read the myth quickly again and find all the expressions with do or make.<br />
List them in your notebook.<br />
14 Fill in the blanks in this conversation with make or do.<br />
Juliet: I have to ________ a telephone call.<br />
Steve: Who are you going to call?<br />
Juliet: Sarah, she has not ________ a decision about the party yet.<br />
Steve: Don't worry. You know that whatever she ________ she always<br />
________ her best.<br />
Juliet: Yes, but time's running out and I can't ________ exceptions for<br />
anybody. She has to ________ up her mind.<br />
Steve: It's going to be OK. You ________ the plans for the party a long time<br />
ago and everything else is going fine.<br />
Juliet: I'm sure you're right. Hey, can you ________ me a favour?<br />
Steve: Sure.<br />
Steve: Can you ________ the arrangements for the party balloons and the<br />
flowers?<br />
Steve: Don't worry. I will do all the work!<br />
15 Complete this interview with young athlete, Jenna. What are her<br />
wishes / regrets? Use the verbs in the box. Check with the recording.<br />
Reporter: So Jenna, do you speak any foreign languages?<br />
Jenna: Only English, but I _____________ French and Spanish.<br />
Reporter: Why Spanish?<br />
Jenna: Because I _____________ travel around South America, but in<br />
fact I can't.<br />
Reporter: What's stopping you?<br />
Jenna: As an athlete I spend most of my time practising.<br />
I _____________ more time for a few hobbies.<br />
Reporter: When do you think you'll have more time?<br />
Jenna: I _____________ ! I'm really busy now with the London<br />
Olympics coming.<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
· can · have · know · speak<br />
16 Listen to the recording and practise the interview. Role play it in front<br />
of the class.
FAST CHECK<br />
17 What are Stephen's wishes? (10 points)<br />
a. I don't have a dog, but I _____________________________________.<br />
b. Today is Thursday, but I ______________________________________.<br />
c. I can't speak German but I ___________________________________.<br />
d. It is cold and rainy outside; I __________________________________.<br />
e. I'm really hungry! I _________________________________________.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
18 Write five of your own wishes. Remember to include an introductory<br />
sentence.<br />
PLAY IT<br />
Play this noughts and crosses game with a partner.<br />
a. Choose a third student as a referee.<br />
b. Copy the table in your notebook and then choose either noughts ( O ) or crosses ( X ).<br />
c. You get the field if you make a correct sentence using the words provided.<br />
d. The person who gets three noughts or three crosses in a line wins the game.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
Do homework<br />
Make an exception<br />
Make a decision<br />
Make money<br />
Do a favour<br />
Do harm<br />
Make a cake<br />
Do my best<br />
Make a bed<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
123
124<br />
IʻD LIKE TO APPLY!<br />
LISTENING<br />
UNIT 4<br />
1<br />
2<br />
1<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Match the words in the box with the definitions (a. - d.)<br />
· applicant · apply for · interview · interviewer<br />
a. To request or look for assistance, employment, or admission.<br />
b. A formal meeting in person, especially one arranged to asses the<br />
professional competences of a person.<br />
c. A person who wants to get a job and asks for it.<br />
d. A person conducting an interview.<br />
Lesson 4<br />
What do these people want? Match the pictures (1 - 4) with what the<br />
people say (a. - d.).<br />
3 4<br />
a.<br />
I don't want to<br />
see you again!<br />
b.<br />
I want to see<br />
the manager!<br />
2<br />
c.<br />
I wish you a<br />
Merry<br />
Christmas.<br />
d.<br />
I'd like to apply<br />
for the job.
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
Read the list of duties below. Which ones do you think are the duties of a<br />
receptionist?<br />
a. Answering calls and taking messages.<br />
b. Cooking the boss's lunch and dinner.<br />
c. Dealing with phone enquiries.<br />
d. Driving the company car.<br />
e. Greeting visitors and directing them to the correct person or department.<br />
f. Issuing security passes.<br />
g. Keeping the reception area tidy.<br />
h. Keeping the visitors' book.<br />
i. Providing information to visitors.<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Listen to the two interviews and check your predictions in Exercise 3.<br />
Listen again and fill in this file for each person interviewed.<br />
Name<br />
Surname<br />
Current workplace<br />
Languages<br />
Skills / Duties<br />
Listen to the interviews again. One person uses quite informal<br />
language. Which one? Make a list of the informal terms he / she uses.<br />
7 Listen again. Which word is being used? Choose the best alternative.<br />
a. I wish to apply for the job I saw in the art / ad.<br />
b. I have been a receptionist for a law / lawn firm<br />
c. How are your computer skills / skips?<br />
d. I'm quite useless / useful at languages.<br />
8<br />
Age<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
Interview I Interview II<br />
In pairs discuss both interviews. Who do you think should get the job?<br />
Give reasons. Compare with other pairs.<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
125
126<br />
UNIT 4<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Expressing what we want<br />
1. We can express what we want using two expressions: want to and would<br />
like to.<br />
Examples: I want to be a fire fighter when I grow up.<br />
I would like to be a pop singer when I'm older.<br />
2. The only difference between the two is that would like to is more polite<br />
or tentative than want to.<br />
3. We sometimes use wish + infinitive as a formal alternative to want to or<br />
would like to with reference to present and future wish situations.<br />
Examples: I wish to make a complaint and I would like to see the manager.<br />
I do not wish to renew my subscription; I want to cancel it<br />
right now.<br />
I wish to remove my name from your database. I want a<br />
solution now.<br />
I don't ever wish to see you again!<br />
4. We can also use wish to express good wishes.<br />
Examples: We wish you a merry Christmas.<br />
We wish you a speedy recovery.<br />
I wish you all the best on your birthday.<br />
5. Read these examples from the recording. Which of them can you rewrite<br />
using would like to and want?<br />
I wish to apply for the job.<br />
We wish you lots of luck.<br />
Why do you wish to change jobs?<br />
9<br />
Complete these sentences using wish, would like to or want to.<br />
a. I ____________________________________________ a glass of water.<br />
b. She _____________________________________ meet us after school.<br />
c. I __________________________________________ make a complaint.<br />
d. When __________________ you __________________ your breakfast?<br />
e. A: How can I help you?<br />
B: I _________________________________________ cash this cheque.<br />
f. What _________________ you ________________ drink: coffee or tea?<br />
g. A: _______________________ you _________________ some dessert?<br />
B: Yes, I ___________________________________________ some cake.
10 Ask and answer these questions with your partner, providing true<br />
information about yourself.<br />
a. What would you like to drink?<br />
b. Where do you want to go after school?<br />
c. What do you wish to change about yourself?<br />
d. What would you like to study?<br />
e. Where do you wish to live in the future?<br />
f. Why do people want to be popular?<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
11 Listen to the recording and practise the dialogues with your partner.<br />
Replace the parts underlined with your own ideas. Role play one in front<br />
of the class.<br />
I<br />
II<br />
Glen: Do you ever wish you were<br />
someone else?<br />
Ross: Yes, sometimes.<br />
Glen: Who would you like to be?<br />
Ross: Sometimes I want to be a<br />
football player and sometimes<br />
I want to be a rock star.<br />
Glen: Yeah, I wish I could be a<br />
famous guitar player or a<br />
drummer in Cold Play.<br />
Ross: There is a Cold Play concert<br />
next week. I would like to go.<br />
Glen: If you want we can try to get<br />
tickets.<br />
Mr. Drake: I would like to see the shop<br />
manager.<br />
Assistant: What is it about, Sir?<br />
Mr. Drake: I wish to make a complaint<br />
about the refrigerator I bought<br />
from the shop.<br />
Assistant: What seems to be the<br />
problem?<br />
Mr. Drake: I want to change it because it<br />
isn‘t working properly.<br />
Assistant: Would you like to take a seat,<br />
please? The manager will see<br />
you in a moment.<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
127
3<br />
128<br />
UNIT 4<br />
12<br />
Work with a partner and choose one of the jobs advertised here. Follow<br />
the prompts to role play the interview. Take turns to be the interviewer<br />
and the candidate.<br />
Date posted: Monday 16th February | Location: London<br />
We are seeking new faces for catalogue, magazine shoots, TV<br />
adverts, movies, Billboards, and posters.. You could earn £100 to<br />
£600 per day working as a fashion model...Urgently seeking extras<br />
for movies and commercials.<br />
For an appointment pls call 0207 736 9768 and 0207 736 1661 or<br />
email us with your picture (doesn‘t have to be professional)<br />
You can email us as well (due to high volume of applicants only<br />
successful candidate will be contacted)<br />
Age 16+ no height or race restriction, all nationalities welcome, no<br />
experience necessary.<br />
Thanks<br />
We are the first building on your left called HURLINGHAM STUDIOS<br />
Location: Kensington, West London (W10) Map - Salary: £9.80p/h -<br />
Company: Brampton Training & Consultancy Ltd - Job type: Contract -<br />
Description:<br />
To work closely with library/information managers in the day-to-day running<br />
of a library or information service.This involves assisting service users to<br />
locate information and resources, often requesting items held in other<br />
libraries; there is considerable contact with people in other departments,<br />
as well as the public.<br />
Hours as follows: Tuesdays 1-3; Thursdays 1-3 Fridays 9-2;<br />
Saturdays 9-1=13 hours per week.<br />
Applicants to have library and customer service experience<br />
Interviewer: Greet and invite candidate to sit.<br />
You: Respond.<br />
Interviewer: Ask candidate which position he / she is applying for.<br />
You: Reply<br />
Interviewer: Ask candidate's name and age.<br />
You: Reply<br />
Interviewer: Ask candidate about his / her experience.<br />
You: Mention your past and present jobs and the languages you speak.<br />
Interviewer: Ask candidate about his / her duties<br />
You: Answer.<br />
Interviewer: Ask candidate about his / her computer skills.<br />
You: Answer.<br />
Interviewer: Ask candidate any other relevant question(s).<br />
You: Answer.<br />
Interviewer: End the interview.<br />
1<br />
Date posted: Monday 16th February |<br />
Location: West London (Kensington)<br />
Please reply to this add ONLY<br />
if you comply with all requirements:<br />
We are looking for a responsible<br />
and confident nanny to look after<br />
our 9-month old baby on a<br />
PART-TIME basis.<br />
We are located in<br />
Kensington (W8).<br />
MUST HAVE:<br />
• British Nationality (English as<br />
a native language)<br />
• Non-smoker<br />
• Excellent references<br />
• Previous experience with babies<br />
Look forward to hearing from you.<br />
2
FAST CHECK<br />
13 Complete these sentences with the correct structure after wish (past<br />
simple or infinitive)<br />
a. Winter is beautiful in this city, but I wish we _________<br />
(10 points)<br />
some snow! (have)<br />
b. If you wish _________ to the director send him a letter first. (talk)<br />
c. I'm quite short; I wish I _________ taller.<br />
d. On their next trip to Asia they wish _________ the Great Wall<br />
(be)<br />
in China. (visit)<br />
e. I can't understand Françoise! I wish _________ some French. (know)<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
14 Read this advertisement for the position of waiter / waitress. Write a list of<br />
questions you would ask a candidate for the job. Compare with another<br />
student.<br />
Listening<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
Waiter/waitress needed<br />
Your duties will be:<br />
• Provide excellent customer service.<br />
• Assist customers with special needs.<br />
• Inform customers of daily specials and prices.<br />
• Suggest menu selections to customers.<br />
• Operate a cash register.<br />
• Promptly remove dishes and glasses from the tables.<br />
Pizza e pasta - Restaurant<br />
Must be over 18 as alcoholic drinks are served on the premises.<br />
Our restaurant, which opens between 5 p.m. and 2 a.m., has a large number of Italian customers.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
129
1<br />
130<br />
Carol and Greg are planning their wedding party. They are preparing a list of things they are or are not<br />
going to do. Use their notes to write full sentences. Use going to + infinitive to write the sentences.<br />
Yes<br />
✔ Make a guest list<br />
✔ Rent a salon for the<br />
wedding<br />
✔ Get a music band<br />
✔ Buy flowers<br />
✔ Order food and drink<br />
✔ Buy dress for Carole<br />
✔ Buy suit for Greg<br />
✔ Buy wedding rings<br />
✔ Write invitations<br />
No<br />
✘ Rent a limousine<br />
✘ Go on a honeymoon<br />
✘ Invite people we don't like<br />
✘ Worry about problems!<br />
UNIT 4
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
Carol and her friend Gina are discussing the wedding. Using the list in Exercise 1 and your sentences<br />
prepare a conversation between the two friends with Gina asking questions and Carol answering them.<br />
Example: Gina: Are you going to rent a limousine?<br />
Carol: No, we aren't. We are going to use my car.<br />
Match the two parts and write the complete sentences in your notebook.<br />
If you are going to do something I am definitely not coming; I can't stand him!<br />
If you are going to drive I will just leave the room.<br />
If you are going to travel abroad she should watch foreign films.<br />
If he is going to keep shouting at me make sure that you do it well!<br />
If John is going to come to the party make sure you don't drink any alcohol.<br />
If she is going to study languages don't forget to take your passport.<br />
What is Davina's life like and what would she like it to be? Fill in the blanks in her story.<br />
My name is Davina but I really don't<br />
like my name. I wish _________.<br />
I am really very tall and I wish<br />
____________________<br />
____________________.<br />
My parents and I live on a farm in the<br />
country, but I wish __________.<br />
On the farm I spend a lot of time<br />
looking after the animals; I wish<br />
____________________.<br />
All my best friends live very far away<br />
and I wish ______________.<br />
Next week there is a rock concert in<br />
Colchester but I can't go. I wish<br />
____________.<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
131
READING - MAKING CURANTO<br />
During our journey in Chile we saw and<br />
experienced many interesting sights and<br />
adventures. We visited Santiago with its<br />
beautiful Plaza de Armas and we ate fish in<br />
the Central Market. We went to Valparaíso<br />
where (1) ____________ and we bathed in<br />
the Pacific Ocean in Viña del Mar. We also<br />
went to a beautiful skiing resort - Valle<br />
Nevado - (2) ____________ and where the<br />
view is really spectacular. But one of the<br />
most interesting experiences was our visit to<br />
Calbuco, in the south, where we learned the<br />
tradition of curanto.<br />
“The dish comes from the nearby island of<br />
Chiloe, where I was born,” explains<br />
Roberto, our tourist guide who<br />
(3) ____________. “It's still cooked the<br />
original way, in underground ovens, heated<br />
with hot stones and covered with leaves. It<br />
is really delicious and especially good on a<br />
cold day - we get lots of cold days in the<br />
south of Chile!"<br />
Many cultures of the world used to cook<br />
their food by burying it all in the earth and<br />
the Araucanians, native from Chile, also<br />
followed this tradition. With the arrival of<br />
spring, and thankful for the end of winter,<br />
they organised (4) ____________. They<br />
1<br />
132<br />
Read the text and these sentences that were removed from it. Put them back in their<br />
corresponding places (1) - (5).<br />
a. is taking us around Calbuco<br />
b. parties to thank mother nature for good weather<br />
c. The biggest curanto in the world<br />
d. we took a boat tour<br />
e. where people do winter sports<br />
UNIT 4<br />
made big holes in the ground and put lots<br />
of different food inside: food they collected<br />
from the ocean, some food from the animals<br />
they caught and all kinds of vegetables they<br />
planted. In their language, curanto means<br />
hot stones.<br />
Calbuco, located some 56 kilometres from<br />
Puerto Montt became famous when it<br />
entered the Guinness Book of Records for<br />
the world's largest curanto. Roberto says:<br />
"We expected 2,000 people for dinner, but<br />
5,000 showed up!" (5) ____________ was 160<br />
metres long and used 5 tons of shellfish.<br />
National press and other sources<br />
5 pts.
2 Read the text again and tick the correct picture.<br />
a. In Santiago, the tourists visited<br />
Santa Lucía hill. The Plaza de Armas.<br />
b. They ate fish at<br />
San Cristóbal hill. The Central Market.<br />
c. In Valparaíso they took a<br />
boat tour.<br />
d. They went swimming in<br />
Concón.<br />
e. They saw the spectacular view from<br />
Farellones.<br />
city tour.<br />
Viña del Mar.<br />
Valle Nevado.<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
5 pts.<br />
133
134<br />
3 Read the text once more and answer these questions.<br />
a. How far is Calbuco from from Puerto Montt?<br />
b. How big was the biggest curanto?<br />
c. How many people came to eat it?<br />
d. How much shellfish was used?<br />
LISTENING - HOW TO USE IT<br />
4 Listen to the recording and choose the best option.<br />
a. The first recording provides instruction for the use of a cash machine / video recorder.<br />
b. The second recording provides the instructions for the use of a microwave oven / a<br />
payphone.<br />
c. The first set of instructions is recorded by a restaurant / a bank.<br />
d. The second set of instructions is recorded by a shop customer service / phone company.<br />
5 Listen to the second set of instructions again and complete them.<br />
a. First, you __________________________________________________________________.<br />
b. Then, you _________________________________________________________________.<br />
c. After that you ______________________________________________________________.<br />
d. Later, you __________________________________________________________________.<br />
e. Then, you _________________________________________________________________.<br />
f. Finally, you ________________________________________________________________.<br />
LANGUAGE<br />
6 Write questions for the underlined parts using the question words in brackets.<br />
a. Jackie is going to visit her grandparents in Torquay (who).<br />
b. Torquay is a nice little town on the coast. (where).<br />
c. She is going to drive (how).<br />
d. Before she goes, she is going to buy them a box of chocolates (what).<br />
e. She is going to buy the present because it is her grandmother's birthday. (why).<br />
f. She and her grandparents are going to have lunch at a restaurant by the sea (where).<br />
7 Choose the correct verb, make or do.<br />
a. If you want to do / make business you need some money first.<br />
b. Do / make me a favour and open the window, please.<br />
c. After doing / making the beds she did / made lunch.<br />
d. The vacuum cleaner is doing / making a funny noise.<br />
8 Complete the sentences with wish + Simple past tense or wish + infinitive.<br />
a. She wishes __________ the first woman to stand on the Moon. (be)<br />
b. I'm so busy. I wish I __________ more time to myself. (have)<br />
c. She is a good athlete but she wishes she __________ much better. (be).<br />
d. Dear sir, the reason I'm writing this letter is because I wish __________ a reservation. (make)<br />
UNIT 4<br />
4 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
6 pts.<br />
6 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
4 pts.
SPEAKING<br />
9<br />
Complete this conversation with the corresponding questions. Then role play it with a partner.<br />
A: ________________________________________________________________________?<br />
B: I think the hotel is 3 kilometres from the city centre.<br />
A: ________________________________________________________________________?<br />
B: It takes 10 minutes by car and 45 minutes walking.<br />
A: ________________________________________________________________________?<br />
B: The taxi fare is around 2,000 pesos.<br />
A: ________________________________________________________________________?<br />
B: We are going to stay in the city for 5 days.<br />
WRITING<br />
10 Imagine that you have found a magic lamp and you can ask the genie for five wishes. What<br />
would they be? Write them down using wish + Simple Past tense.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
1 - 19<br />
Not too good<br />
FINAL CHECK ✔ ✔<br />
Choose one alternative according to your performance.<br />
Speaking<br />
· I use English structures correctly.<br />
· I use varied and correct vocabulary.<br />
· Others can understand me.<br />
Writing<br />
· My writing is coherent and follows the central idea.<br />
· I use the correct sentence formation and sentence structure.<br />
· I use correct spelling, punctuation, capitalisation and format.<br />
Reading<br />
· I am aware of the differences in tenses, gender and number.<br />
· I identify the main idea and understand the text as a whole.<br />
· I can locate details and look for specific information.<br />
Listening<br />
· I can get the general idea.<br />
· I understand the details and identify speakers.<br />
· I identify the source of the listening text and recognise the format.<br />
Group work<br />
· I share my ideas with the group.<br />
· I listen to and respect my partners' points of view.<br />
· I help solve problems and contribute relevant information.<br />
20 - 39<br />
Acceptable<br />
Always<br />
Nearly Always<br />
Sometimes<br />
Never<br />
40 - 58<br />
Great!<br />
Total<br />
58 pts.<br />
Use this clue to work out your score<br />
Never = 0<br />
Sometimes = 1<br />
Nearly Always = 2<br />
Always = 3<br />
If you get:<br />
0 - 10 = Watch out! You must look back<br />
and review the whole unit. Ask your<br />
teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
11 - 22 = Not too bad, but there are<br />
areas you still have problems with.<br />
Identify those areas and ask your<br />
teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
23 - 34 = You are doing fine, but you<br />
can certainly do better. Get together<br />
with a classmate and review your weak<br />
points.<br />
35 - 45 = Congratulations! Great<br />
progress - you may look ahead to the<br />
new unit and help your classmates who<br />
need to review.<br />
WHATEVER YOU DO OR MAKE - DO IT AND MAKE IT WELL!<br />
10 pts.<br />
10 pts.<br />
135
136<br />
IN THIS UNIT YOU WILL LEARN TO:<br />
Reading: Identify and establish mood of a text / Differentiate<br />
between fact and opinion / Match written and visual clues /<br />
Discriminate between correct and incorrect information<br />
Listening: Identify the tone of spoken messages / Identify<br />
speakers / Find specific information<br />
Production: Express opinions and personal points of view /<br />
Talk about wishes and regrets / Tell people what you want and<br />
need / Talk about how to protect our planet<br />
Functions: Express opinions and personal points of view /<br />
Express necessity, needs and wishes / Express obligation<br />
YOU WILL USE THE FOLLOWING TEXT TYPES:<br />
Reading: Anecdotes / A song<br />
Listening: A newsletter / An article with predictions<br />
YOU WILL ALSO LEARN:<br />
Grammar: The Passive Voice / Want to, need to, have to, would like to<br />
/ Modal verbs should, ought to, must / Similarities and differences<br />
between must and have to<br />
Vocabulary: Words related to life styles and making a living / Words<br />
related to life in the future<br />
YOU WILL PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THESE VALUES:<br />
Different lifestyles and why we should respect them.
SET UP<br />
1<br />
2<br />
Look at the pictures. Which of these are living organisms?<br />
1 2<br />
4 5 6<br />
Match the words in the box with the definitions (a. – e.).<br />
· life · lifestyle · live (adj.) · living · still-life<br />
a. a means of maintaining life, for example earning an income.<br />
b. a state that distinguishes organisms from non-living objects, such as non-living, and dead organisms.<br />
Organisms in this state are capable of growth and reproduction.<br />
c. a way of life or style of living that reflects the attitudes and values of a person or group.<br />
d. a work of art depicting mostly inanimate objects such as food, flowers, plants, etc .<br />
e. show, programme, news, etc. made or done at the time something is actually happening.<br />
3 Fill in the blanks in these sentences with the words in Exercise 2.<br />
a. That artist never paints portraits or landscapes but he usually dedicates his time to painting<br />
_____________<br />
b. I don’t really care what you think. I like my _____________ even if people say it is alternative.<br />
c. What does she do for a _____________?<br />
d. _____________ can be easy or difficult but it is worth living.<br />
e. The singer’s new album was recorded _____________ at the concert.<br />
3<br />
137
138<br />
out of the<br />
ordinary<br />
ALTERNATIVE LIFESTYLES<br />
READING<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
To narrate personal<br />
experiences we usually<br />
speak in the first person,<br />
singular (I) or plural (we). We<br />
also use possessive<br />
adjectives such as my or our,<br />
and possessive pronouns<br />
such as mine and ours.<br />
Some expressions we can<br />
use are: I know…We<br />
saw…. I experienced…, etc.<br />
UNIT 5<br />
1<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Which words in the bubbles are synonyms?<br />
alternative typical irregular<br />
common<br />
Lesson 1<br />
2 Which pictures below show an alternative lifestyle? Express your point of view.<br />
Use the expressions below:<br />
In my view / in my opinion/ from my point of view/ I feel /I believe<br />
3<br />
4<br />
traditional<br />
unusual extraordinary different<br />
1 2 3<br />
4 5 6<br />
What kind of family is your family? Talk to the people in your group.<br />
Considering the pictures, the title of the lesson and the exercises above,<br />
what do you think the texts will be about?
I.<br />
I know this guy whose<br />
name is Gregory Pike. He<br />
is famous because a video<br />
about him and his pets -<br />
Mousey, Kitty and Booger<br />
- is posted on YouTube<br />
and it is visited by many<br />
people every day. In the<br />
video you can see the<br />
animals standing one on<br />
top of the other and they<br />
all look happy and<br />
friendly! You can see that<br />
Greg loves his pets<br />
because they are well<br />
looked after.<br />
Pike seems to be a strange<br />
guy, but who cares? It<br />
doesn’t matter if you or I<br />
approve of his lifestyle or<br />
not because as I see it, we<br />
are free to live our lives<br />
the way we want to. In<br />
Santa Barbara where he<br />
lives as a homeless person<br />
he is treated with respect<br />
and admiration and<br />
wherever he goes he is<br />
greeted and offered small<br />
presents, and restaurants<br />
keep leftover food for<br />
him. He keeps some of it<br />
for himself, gives a little to<br />
the animals and offers the<br />
rest to other homeless<br />
guys he knows from the<br />
streets of Santa Barbara,<br />
which proves once again<br />
that humanity is the<br />
message.<br />
II.<br />
III.<br />
For a long time my friend Jorge and his wife Sandra, lived a happy<br />
life in Santiago, Chile. They were busy doing their jobs and raising<br />
their daughter, but one day, out of the blue, they decided that city<br />
life was not for them. At first they were not sure about their decision<br />
but then their daughter Isidora got sick with asthma so they made<br />
up their minds, packed their bags and moved to the mountains.<br />
They now live in a house that is built of adobe and the drinking<br />
water they use for cooking and washing is pumped from a nearby<br />
stream. Electricity is generated by solar panels on the roof of the<br />
house. They plant the vegetables they eat and exchange the rest for<br />
things such as beans and rice. From time to time Jorge, who is a<br />
computer engineer, is asked to fix or programme a few computers.<br />
He goes into town and earns some money; Sandra, who is a<br />
fantastic cook, sells her home-made jams and preserves and so they<br />
can pay the bills. At first, their parents were annoyed with Jorge and<br />
Sandra, but now they are convinced it is a good lifestyle. Jorge and<br />
Sandra say this is a very positive experience for the whole family.<br />
They also believe that their healthy and stress-free lifestyle helped<br />
cure their daughter’s asthma.<br />
This girl I know, Tonya Kay is a professional dancer and she has<br />
worked in film and theatre since she was 15. She believes that we<br />
are what we eat and she says that she prefers to be an apple and<br />
not a steak! Tonya says that it was difficult for her because she<br />
grew up on a farm and had to watch the workers kill animals that<br />
were then sold to local supermarkets. Her parents were really<br />
annoyed with her for her radical views but when she was 8 she<br />
decided to become a vegetarian and for the last 11 years she has<br />
been a vegan - a strict vegetarian who eats no animal food or dairy<br />
products and does not use products such as leather. It is very<br />
important for her to follow her ideals. She says that animals are<br />
killed by humans for food but in fact we could all just eat<br />
vegetables and fruit and still live happy and healthy lives. She says<br />
that she is the best example of a healthy person who never eats<br />
animal products. She insists that she hasn’t been sick since<br />
becoming a vegan and, as an athlete, her body recovers in half the<br />
time it used to.<br />
Sources: YouTube, La Tercera, http://www.rawfoodplanet.com<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
139
140<br />
UNIT 5<br />
5<br />
6<br />
Read the text and check your predictions in Exercise 3.<br />
Match the pictures with the stories and choose a title for each.<br />
a. Friends for ever b. Living a simple life c. Staying healthy and athletic<br />
7 Read the text again and choose the best answer to these questions.<br />
a. What is the general mood of the three articles?<br />
i. pessimistic ii. critical<br />
iii. positive iv.indifferent<br />
b. Why did the people in the three articles decide on an alternative lifestyle?<br />
i. They had the obligation to do it. ii. It was their choice.<br />
iii. It was a family tradition. iv.They were bored.<br />
8 Read the texts again and answer these questions.<br />
a. Where can you see a video of Greg with his animal friends?<br />
b. What does Greg do with the food he gets from restaurant owners?<br />
c. What were the lives of Jorge and Sandra like before moving to the mountains?<br />
d. Why was Tonya’s life difficult on the farm where she grew up?<br />
9<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
1 2 3<br />
Read the text again and indicate which of these sentences express a fact<br />
and which ones an opinion.<br />
a. In Santa Barbara, where he lives as a homeless person, he is treated<br />
with respect and admiration.<br />
b. As I see it, we are free to live our lives as we want to.<br />
c. They now live in a house that is built of adobe.<br />
d. They also believe that their healthy and stress-free lifestyle helped cure<br />
their daughter’s asthma.<br />
e. She believes that we are what we eat.<br />
f. Tonya Kay is a professional dancer.<br />
10 Which of these expressions from the text refer to personal experience?<br />
How do you know?<br />
a. This girl I know …<br />
b. Her parents were really annoyed …<br />
c. My friends Jorge and Sandra …<br />
d. I know this guy ….<br />
e. They eat the vegetables they plant …<br />
f. My friend, who is a computer engineer ….<br />
g. At first, their parents were annoyed ….
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
The Passive Voice<br />
1. Read these sentences from the text paying special attention to the verb<br />
form in bold.<br />
a. The pets are well looked after.<br />
b. The drinking water they use for cooking and washing is pumped<br />
from a nearby stream.<br />
c. A video about him and his pets is posted on YouTube.<br />
d. It is visited by many people every day.<br />
2. Notice that in sentences a., b. and c. we do not know who carried out<br />
the actions, although in some cases we can guess.<br />
a. The pets are well looked after by their owner / by Gregory.<br />
b. Water is pumped from the stream by Jorge and Sandra.<br />
3. Notice that in sentence c. we know who carries out the action, but what<br />
is important is the action itself and not the people who do it.<br />
4. Study the form of the Passive Voice.<br />
The animals are abandoned in the streets of Santa Barbara.<br />
Object + is/are + past participle.<br />
5. Go back to the text and find three more sentences in the Passive Voice.<br />
Is the performer of the action stated explicitly? If not, can you guess?<br />
Copy the sentences in your notebook; underline the elements in Point 4.<br />
in different colours.<br />
11 Which of these sentences are in the Passive Voice and which ones use adjectives?<br />
a. We are pleased to know that you can come.<br />
b. I am shocked by your action.<br />
c. Two million bikes are produced each year by that company.<br />
d. She is worried she cannot get there on time.<br />
e. Hundreds of people are offered new houses.<br />
f. Copper is exported from Chile to all parts of the world.<br />
12 The following chart shows quantities of juice that are produced in a<br />
factory. Say / write how much is produced each month.<br />
Example: 10,000 litres of apple juice are produced in the factory in January.<br />
January February March<br />
Apple juice 10,000 litres 15,000 litres 12,000 litres<br />
Apricot juice 6,000 litres 7,000 litres 8,000 litres<br />
Orange juice 8,000 litres 10,000 litres 10,000 litres<br />
Danger<br />
Compare the sentences in A<br />
and B.<br />
A<br />
The pets are abandoned.<br />
The boy is punished.<br />
The girls are invited to a party.<br />
B<br />
The pets are frightened.<br />
The boy is bored.<br />
The girls are interested in<br />
that film.<br />
The structures of the two<br />
groups of sentences look<br />
identical but they express<br />
different ideas. The sentences<br />
in A are in the Passive Voice,<br />
while the sentences in B use<br />
the verb to be and an<br />
adjective.<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
141
142<br />
UNIT 5<br />
13 These books are commonly read by people all over the word. Who are<br />
they written by? Say / write the sentences.<br />
Example: “Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone” is written by J.K. Rowling.<br />
1 2 3 4 5 6<br />
a. J.K. Rowling – “ Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone”<br />
b. J. R.R. Tolkien – “The Fellowship of the Ring”<br />
c. C.S Lewis - “The Chronicles of Narnia”<br />
d. Isabel Allende “The House of the Spirits”<br />
e. Gabriel García Márquez – “100 Years of Solitude”<br />
f. Allegra Goodman - “Intuition”<br />
14 Rewrite these sentences in your notebook using the Passive Voice.<br />
a. Tourists spend a lot of money in that city.<br />
A lot of money _____________________________________________.<br />
b. My father generally writes these text messages.<br />
These text messages _________________________________________.<br />
c. Archeologists often discover ancient tombs.<br />
Ancient tombs ______________________________________________.<br />
d. People eat millions of bars of chocolate every day.<br />
Millions of bars of chocolate ___________________________________.<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
15 Read Lisa Buckley’s school<br />
report card and prepare a<br />
conversation about the teachers’<br />
opinions. Compare with the<br />
recording.<br />
Example:<br />
A: What does Mrs. White think of<br />
Lisa?<br />
B. Lisa is described by Mrs. White<br />
as talented but a bit lazy. Or<br />
B: In Mrs. White’s opinion Lisa is<br />
talented but a bit lazy.<br />
Brown Hill<br />
Comprehensive School<br />
Student’s name: Lisa Buckley<br />
Class: 1 st year C.<br />
Subject Teacher Opinion<br />
Art Mrs. White Talented, but a bit lazy.<br />
English Ms. Jones Quick to learn.<br />
History Mr. Spencer Enthusiastic.<br />
Maths Mr. Stephens Good student.<br />
Music Miss Delaney Excellent student.<br />
Science Miss Jackson Satisfactory.<br />
Spanish Ms. Castro Must improve.<br />
Sports Mr. Crossing Hard worker.
16 Listen and practise the dialogue with your partner. Role play it in<br />
front of the class.<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
17 Change these sentences into the Passive Voice. (10 points)<br />
a. Every year, somebody makes a white and pink cake for my birthday.<br />
b. Somebody cuts the grass in our garden every month.<br />
c. The volunteers cook dinner for the whole group.<br />
d. People send lots of greeting cards for Christmas.<br />
e. That technician repairs at least five computers every day.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
18 Choose someone who has chosen an alternative lifestyle (real or<br />
imaginary) and write a paragraph about their life. You can do research in<br />
the library or on the Internet. These ideas can help you.<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
5 6 7 8<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
143
144<br />
I WOULD LIKE TO DEDICATE THIS SONG...<br />
LISTENING<br />
Lesson 2<br />
1 2<br />
a. I would give her / him a box of<br />
chocolates.<br />
4 5<br />
d. I would dedicate him / her a<br />
song on the radio.<br />
UNIT 5<br />
1<br />
2<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
If you had an argument/ problem with your friend / boyfriend / girlfriend<br />
what would you do to make up? Choose one or two alternatives.<br />
Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry!<br />
Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry!<br />
Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry!<br />
Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry!<br />
Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry!<br />
Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry!<br />
Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry!<br />
Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry!<br />
Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry!<br />
Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry! Sorry!<br />
Sorry! Sorry! Sorry!<br />
3<br />
b. I would send her / him flowers. c. I would write her / him a<br />
message of apology.<br />
e. I would call her / him on the<br />
phone.<br />
f. I would do nothing and wait for<br />
her / him to call me.<br />
Read this list of song titles. Which one would you like to dedicate to a<br />
friend? Why?<br />
a. The Power of Love - Celine Dion<br />
b. Stand by Me – Ben. E. King<br />
c. All I Want is You – U2<br />
d. She will be Loved – Maroon Five<br />
e. I’ll be There for you – from the series “Friends”<br />
f. Other – (name the title and the singer)<br />
6
3<br />
You will hear a radio programme where a young man is dedicating a song<br />
to a girlfriend. Why do you think he is doing this? Choose one alternative.<br />
a. He needs to say he is sorry.<br />
b. He would like to see her again.<br />
c. He wants to tell her he loves her.<br />
d. He wishes she didn’t have to go away.<br />
4 Which of these songs do you think he wants to dedicate to her?<br />
a. You and me<br />
b. In my life<br />
c. Always on my mind<br />
d. I will always love you<br />
5<br />
Listen to the first part of the programme and check your prediction in<br />
Exercise 3.<br />
6 Listen again and find the answers to these questions.<br />
a. What time is the programme on?<br />
b. Who is the programme for?<br />
c. How much time does the listener have to talk about his problem?<br />
d. What would he tell his girlfriend if she was listening to the programme?<br />
7 Listen again and complete these sentences.<br />
a. Others would like to say ______________________________________.<br />
b. I just need to tell someone ____________________________________.<br />
c. I have to get in touch with her _________________________________.<br />
d. I have to tell her to think of the things ___________________________.<br />
8<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Listen to the second part of the programme and check your<br />
prediction in Exercise 4.<br />
9 Listen to the song again. What kind of song is it?<br />
a. Happy. b. Nostalgic.<br />
c. Funny. d. Tragic.<br />
e. Sad. f. Nice.<br />
g. Bitter. h. Warm.<br />
You can find a huge collection of lyrics at www.elyrics.net<br />
Danger<br />
Learning English through<br />
songs is a very good and fun<br />
idea. However, you should<br />
be careful because often song<br />
lyrics contain very colloquial,<br />
abbreviated and sometimes<br />
even incorrect expressions<br />
such as ‘cause, I ain’t, I<br />
wanna, I’m gonna, etc.<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
145
146<br />
UNIT 5<br />
10<br />
Listen to the song once more and identify the word you hear.<br />
a. In my life / time I loved them all.<br />
b. There is no one compares with her / you<br />
c. When I think of love as something new / true<br />
d. And I know I’ll never lose affection / attention<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Want to, need to, have to, would like to<br />
1. Study the sentences from the recording.<br />
a. Some need to say I love you.<br />
b. You want to say you’re sorry.<br />
c. I have to get in touch with her.<br />
d. I’d like to dedicate this song ….<br />
2. We use these verbs to express something we want, need or have an<br />
obligation to do.<br />
3. Need to, want to, and have to are used in the same way as other verbs.<br />
They form the negative form with don’t / doesn’t and the interrogative<br />
form with do / does. Their past tense is needed, wanted, had.<br />
4. Pay attention to would like to.<br />
I would not like to sing that song.<br />
Would you like to play a musical instrument?<br />
5. Rewrite the sentences from the song in Exercise 7 using the different<br />
verbs in this section. How does their meaning change?<br />
11 Complete these sentences with need, would like, want or have to.<br />
a. What ________ you ________ to drink, orange juice or mineral water?<br />
b. If you want to pass the test you ________ pay attention to what the<br />
teacher is saying.<br />
c. I ________ to be a pilot when I finish school.<br />
d. You ________ to be more careful when you cross the street.<br />
e. I don’t ________ your help, thank you. I can do it on my own.
12 Change these sentences into the negative form. Use the correct tense.<br />
a. She wanted to invite 50 guests to the party.<br />
b. I need to get ready for the trip.<br />
c. They would like to ask you for help.<br />
d. She had to pay for the holiday with her credit card.<br />
e. They need to revise for the test.<br />
f. We want to collect a lot of money for the class trip.<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
13 Use the visual clues to complete the conversations. Check with the<br />
recording.<br />
Diana: If you were a famous pop star, who would you like to be?<br />
You: ______________________________________________________<br />
Diana: When you finish school, where would you like to live?<br />
You: ______________________________________________________<br />
Diana: What do you want to eat, pizza or pasta?<br />
You: ______________________________________________________<br />
Diana: Do you have to study chemistry or physics?<br />
You: ______________________________________________________<br />
Diana: To make a brownie, do I need milk or water?<br />
You: ______________________________________________________<br />
14<br />
Listen to the recording and practise the dialogues with a partner.<br />
Answer using your own ideas. Role play the conversations in front of the<br />
class.<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
147
148<br />
1 2<br />
3<br />
UNIT 5<br />
15 Match the pictures (1 – 3) with the expressions (a. - c.).<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
16 Choose the best option to complete these sentences. (10 points)<br />
a. What we really ___________ do is get rid of the old car.<br />
i. need to ii. need<br />
b. You ___________ eat that if you are not hungry.<br />
i. need to ii. don’t have to<br />
c. How ___________ you ___________ your coffee: white or black?<br />
i. would like ii. would need<br />
d. They ___________ come with us. They said they were too busy.<br />
i. don’t want to ii. didn’t want to<br />
e. You ___________ to buy us a present, but thank you very much!<br />
i. needn’t ii. didn’t have<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
a. I'm sorry, sir, but I need to see your ticket.<br />
b. We need to buy some weed killer.<br />
c. Would you like to take a seat?<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
17 Write a note to a friend you have had a problem/argument with or to<br />
someone you miss very much and need to get in touch with. What would<br />
you like to tell her / him?<br />
PLAY IT<br />
Play this memory game in your group.<br />
a. Work in groups of 5 - 8 students and collect 10 – 15 small objects<br />
(keys, pens, pictures, rubbers, sweets, etc.).<br />
b. Put them on the desk in a specific order and then look at them very<br />
carefully, trying to memorise the positions.<br />
c. Ask one person to move away from the group and change the<br />
position of two of the objects.<br />
d. The person who has moved away has to discover which objects<br />
changed positions and where.<br />
Example: The key ring was next to the red pen; now it is next to the sweets.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
149
150<br />
LIFE AS WE KNEW IT<br />
READING<br />
UNIT 5<br />
1<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Lesson 3<br />
Do you know these famous places? What are their names? Where are they?<br />
1 2 3 4 5<br />
2<br />
Copy this word map into your notebook. Classify the words in the box<br />
into the corresponding categories.<br />
Structures<br />
Man - made Natural<br />
Modern Ancient Water Solid<br />
· Buckingham Palace · Easter Island · Mount Everest<br />
· Mount Rushmore · Niteroi bridge · San Cristóbal hill<br />
· The Alhambra · The Antarctic Peninsula · The Atacama Desert<br />
· The Bío Bío river · The Central Valley · The Channel Tunnel<br />
· The Colosseum · The Eiffel Tower · The Empire State Building<br />
· The Entel Tower · The Forbidden City · The Maipo Canyon<br />
· The Moon · The National Stadium · The Nile<br />
· The Pacific Ocean · The Sphinx · The Statue of Liberty<br />
· The Tinguiririca Bridge · The Yangtze River dam<br />
You will find hundreds of famous man-made structures at<br />
http://www.teachnet.ie/roleary/index.html with the corresponding<br />
descriptions and pictures.
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
Which words from Exercise 2 would you expect to find in a text about life<br />
on earth without human population?<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Read the text and check your predictions in Exercise 3.<br />
Four important landmarks in the pictures below were mentioned in the<br />
text. Which ones? Which ones are not mentioned?<br />
1 2 3<br />
4 5 6<br />
6<br />
Read the text again. Notice that parts of it have been taken out (a. – f.).<br />
Choose the replacement from the options provided (i. or ii.).<br />
a. i. our staff reporter ii. Prof. David Gellibrand<br />
b. i. everything intact ii. almost nothing<br />
c. i. were ancient Egyptians ii. 20th century American<br />
d. i. no more gas ii. no more power<br />
e. i. former domestic pets ii. dolphins and sharks<br />
f. i. only cities will be left ii. nothing will be left<br />
Bear it<br />
in mind<br />
Have you noticed that some<br />
of the words in exercise 2<br />
use the definite article the<br />
and some don't?<br />
We use the before:<br />
• names of rivers, oceans<br />
and seas (the Nile, the<br />
Pacific)<br />
• points on the globe (the<br />
Equator, the North Pole)<br />
• geographical areas (the<br />
west)<br />
• deserts, forests, gulfs, and<br />
peninsulas (the Sahara, the<br />
Black Forest, the Persian<br />
Gulf, the Iberian Peninsula)<br />
• buildings (The Empire State<br />
Building)<br />
We do not use the before:<br />
• names of countries (Italy,<br />
Mexico) except the<br />
Netherlands and the USA.<br />
• names of cities, towns, or<br />
states (Seoul, Manitoba,<br />
Miami)<br />
• names of streets (Main<br />
Street, Cedar Street)<br />
• names of lakes (Lake<br />
Titicaca, Lake Michigan)<br />
• names of mountains (Mount<br />
Everest, Mount Aconcagua)<br />
except with ranges of<br />
mountains like the Andes,<br />
the Alps<br />
• names of continents (Asia,<br />
America)<br />
• names of islands (Easter<br />
Island, Staten Island) except<br />
with island chains such as<br />
the Canary Islands<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
151
I.II.<br />
III.<br />
152<br />
A warm welcome to all readers.<br />
It’s been a few months since our<br />
last newsletter. First of all, we<br />
would like to greet and thank all<br />
our contributors who support it<br />
with their kind donations. Please<br />
notice that from next month on<br />
you should send your donations<br />
to our new account in Barclays<br />
Bank. You may also send checks<br />
but please do not send any cash<br />
in your letters.<br />
This month, the main article for<br />
the newsletter is written by the<br />
well-known anthropologist<br />
Professor Gellibrand. If you<br />
want to contact him you ought<br />
to send your mails to<br />
dgellibrand@gmail.com. He’ll be<br />
happy to answer all your<br />
questions about Earth when we<br />
are gone.<br />
Pictures are provided by the<br />
National Geographic.<br />
Earth without us, by (a.)<br />
_____________________________<br />
Welcome to Planet Earth: Population 0. When you look around all<br />
you can see is abandoned buildings - now they are “vertical<br />
ecosystems” complete with birds, rodents and even plant life. Bears<br />
and foxes walking down the streets in California where once<br />
Hollywood stars walked. Our cars are turned into piles of dust, our<br />
house pets replaced by all kinds of animals, the sky dark without<br />
any lights on. This is what it may look like without inhabitants,<br />
meaning us – humans. The images you can see in the brochure are<br />
created to illustrate what would happen if human life stopped<br />
tomorrow, if, for whatever reason (nuclear disaster, World War III, a<br />
plague, or a super volcanic eruption) mankind disappeared.<br />
If we disappeared what would happen to our cities? How much<br />
would we leave behind? What might an alien visitor learn about<br />
us when landing on our planet a century or more after we<br />
vanish from it?<br />
The answer, astonishingly, is: (b.) ____________. Within a<br />
hundred years most traces of our modern-day lives might not<br />
be visible at all - destroyed by weather, corrosion, earth tremors,<br />
surviving animals, insects and bacteria.<br />
How do we know that? We know it must be true because we can<br />
see it from previous experiences, with Pompeii devoured by a<br />
volcano and Machu Picchu, which disappeared under jungle plants.<br />
The 1986 nuclear power plant accident at Chernobyl and its<br />
terrible consequences provides an interesting case study of what<br />
happens to big cities after they are abandoned by human<br />
inhabitants. Based on this experience, we think that an alien<br />
visiting Earth might believe that the last civilization on the<br />
planet (c.) ___________.<br />
So what might happen if we stop existing? First of all, lights will start going out around the world<br />
almost immediately. There will be (d.) ____________. Fire will consume important cities such as Rome<br />
and New York City might very well fall into pieces. After only six months, urban areas may become<br />
repopulated but not by humans but by wild animals, including (e.) _______________. Ten years later,<br />
vegetation will cover important landmarks such as Buckingham Palace, the Kremlin or the Empire<br />
State Building. Within 20 years wolves, lions, foxes and bears will be the master species, walking the<br />
streets. Buildings made of wood will be the first victims of humidity and plant life - they will be the<br />
first ones to fall. After 40 to 50 years metal structures such as the Eiffel Tower in Paris, Christ the<br />
Redeemer in Rio de Janeiro and the Statue of Liberty in New York will corrode and fall down. And<br />
with time, (f.) ______________.<br />
It must be a pretty sad vision - what once was a wonderful man-made civilisation will become nothing<br />
but an overgrown jungle where animals once again are kings. Maybe we ought to sit down and think<br />
about what the future holds for us. Maybe we should think how to prevent such a disaster.<br />
Source: TV documentary, Life After People, by Gordon Masterton, former president of the Royal Institution of Civil Engineers.<br />
UNIT 5
7<br />
Some words in the text are in bold. Read again and find out what they<br />
refer to.<br />
a. Paragraph I<br />
it – refers to _______________<br />
him – refers to _______________<br />
b. Paragraph II<br />
it - refers to _______________<br />
c. Paragraph III<br />
they – refers to _______________<br />
8 Read the text once more and decide if these statements are true or false.<br />
a. We have previous experience with disappearing civilisations.<br />
b. Weather, corrosion and earth tremors might destroy our cities within 5<br />
years.<br />
c. Nearly immediately there will be no lights.<br />
d. Within 20 years humans will still be the master species.<br />
e. What may finally remain will be an overgrown jungle.<br />
9<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
Insert the definite article the where necessary.<br />
Dear John,<br />
How have you been? As for me I have finally arrived in ____ USA<br />
landing at ____ JFK Airport on a flight from ____ Vienna,<br />
____ Austria. We flew over ____ Spain and the view of<br />
____ Pyrenees was spectacular! At the beginning of the journey<br />
there was a quick stop over in ____ Rio de Janeiro; I had really<br />
hoped to see ____ Amazon but unfortunately it is in another<br />
part of ____ Brazil.<br />
____ New York is spectacular. This afternoon we had a quick<br />
walk in ____ Central Park and tomorrow we are planning to visit<br />
____ Statue of Liberty. If we have time we will also see ____<br />
Empire State Building.<br />
I am staying at a little hotel called ____ Madison which is<br />
located on the corner of ____ 42 nd<br />
Street and ____ 5 th<br />
Avenue.<br />
That’s’ all for now. Send my love to mum and dad.<br />
Your brother<br />
Richard<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
153
154<br />
UNIT 5<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Modal Verbs<br />
1. Study these examples from the text paying special attention to the<br />
words in bold.<br />
a. It must be true because we have previous experience.<br />
b. New York City might very well fall into pieces.<br />
c. You should send your donations to our new account in Barclays Bank.<br />
d. We ought to sit down and think about what the future holds for us.<br />
2. Which sentence expresses<br />
a. possibility?<br />
b. suggestion / recommendation?<br />
c. certainty?<br />
3. We use might to express that something is possible. We use must to<br />
express that something is fairly certain. We use ought to / should to<br />
express a suggestion / recommendation.<br />
4. Notice that ought to, unlike other modal verb, is used with to, which is<br />
an integral part of the verb.<br />
5. Find more sentences with these modals in the text. Can you identify<br />
what they express?<br />
10 Match the sentences (a. - d.) with the pictures (1 - 4).<br />
a. But Susie, you should wash your hands!<br />
b. Look at those clouds. It might rain soon.<br />
c. He must be out. We’ve been knocking for 5 minutes.<br />
d. You ought to wash your car. It’s really dirty.<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
11 Choose the best option, i. or ii.<br />
a. I want to get a cold drink.<br />
i. You should buy some juice. ii. You want to buy some juice.<br />
b. I need to go to Buzios.<br />
i. You have to buy a ticket. ii. You ought to go the market.<br />
c. I wish to make a complaint.<br />
i. You should talk to the manager. ii. You must not talk to the manager.
HAVE A CHAT<br />
12 Look at the pictures (1 - 4) and complete the dialogues. What do the<br />
people want, need or wish for?<br />
a. A: Well, we definitely have a problem.<br />
B: ____________________________________________________<br />
b. A: Isn’t this weather awful?<br />
B: ____________________________________________________<br />
c. A: Are we going to have some watermelon?<br />
B: __________________________. _________________________<br />
d. A: Which of the toys would you like to have?<br />
B: ____________________________________________________<br />
13 Listen to the recording and check your dialogues. Then practise them<br />
with a partner.<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
14<br />
Fill in the blanks in these sentences with a suitable modal verb, must,<br />
might, ought to, or should. (10 points)<br />
a. A: It’s five o’clock and he is still not here.<br />
B: He _______ be lost without a map.<br />
b. If you want to pass your test you _______ study more.<br />
c. A: Where are my glasses?<br />
B: I think they _______ be in your handbag.<br />
d. A: What do you suggest I do in London?<br />
B: You _______ visit Buckingham Palace and the Tower of London.<br />
e. A: Look at Denis. His face is red and he is coughing.<br />
B: He _______ have a bad cold.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
15<br />
Choose a city you know well or do some Internet research. Describe the<br />
city and suggest things to do there. Use might, ought to and should).<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
1<br />
3<br />
2<br />
4<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
155
156<br />
LIFE AS IT WILL BE<br />
LISTENING<br />
UNIT 5<br />
1<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Lesson 4<br />
Which of these images do you think reflect life in the future? Explain your<br />
choice.<br />
1 2<br />
3 4<br />
2 Read this poem aloud. What is it about?<br />
The animals went in two by two, hurrah! hurrah!<br />
The animals went in two by two, the elephant and the kangaroo<br />
And they all went into the ark, just to get out of the rain.<br />
The animals went in three by three, hurrah! hurrah!<br />
The animals went in three by three, the wasp, the ant and the bumble bee<br />
And they all went into the ark, just to get out of the rain.<br />
The animals went in four by four, hurrah! hurrah!<br />
The animals went in four by four, the great hippopotamus stuck in the door<br />
And they all went into the ark, just to get out of the rain.<br />
The animals went in five by five, hurrah! hurrah!<br />
The animals went in five by five, they warmed each other to keep alive<br />
And they all went into the ark, just to get out of the rain.
3<br />
4<br />
Humans must abandon the Earth because of a natural disaster and live in space.<br />
Look at the questions and answer them in your group. Use ought to / might.<br />
Sleep<br />
How can they sleep<br />
when they are<br />
floating in space?<br />
Clothes<br />
Do they<br />
need special clothes<br />
while living and<br />
working inside the<br />
space shuttle?<br />
5<br />
6<br />
You will listen to a text about protecting the Earth from a possible future<br />
disaster. Which words from the box would you expect to hear?<br />
· accident · catastrophe · nuclear war · problem<br />
· tragedy · cataclysm · flood · global warming<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
1<br />
Sickness<br />
What do they do<br />
if they get sick in<br />
space?<br />
Bath<br />
Do they<br />
take baths while<br />
living and working<br />
in the space<br />
shuttle?<br />
Exercise<br />
Do they<br />
not<br />
need to exercise<br />
in space?<br />
Listen to the recording and check your predictions in Exercise 4. List<br />
all the words from the box mentioned in the recording. Are they<br />
synonyms?<br />
Which of these old proverbs is mentioned in the recording? What<br />
does it mean?<br />
a. Once bitten twice shy.<br />
b. One bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.<br />
c. Better to be safe than sorry.<br />
2<br />
Entertainment<br />
How do they<br />
spend their<br />
free<br />
time?<br />
Food<br />
What do they<br />
eat in space?<br />
Cleaning<br />
Do they<br />
sweep<br />
and clean up<br />
the inside of the<br />
space shuttle?<br />
5 6 7 8<br />
3<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
4<br />
157
158<br />
UNIT 5<br />
7<br />
Identify five types of vegetables that are mentioned in the recording<br />
and one that is not. Write the names in your notebook.<br />
1 2 3<br />
4 5 6<br />
8<br />
Who said these sentences, the teacher or one of the students?<br />
a. _____________: Noah was an old man who saved all the animals on<br />
earth from a flood.<br />
b. _____________: Can we store enough food for everybody?<br />
c. _____________: The cave is called the Doomsday Vault.<br />
d. _____________: But what if the seeds go bad?<br />
e. _____________: The seeds are stored at temperatures of -18ºC.<br />
9 Listen again and complete these sentences.<br />
a. We have to prepare for __________, maybe for a __________ war.<br />
b. Swedish __________ say that the best way to prepare for a __________<br />
is to store __________.<br />
c. They are preparing a very __________ chamber in a __________ in a<br />
remote Arctic __________.<br />
d. This chamber, wich looks like a long tunnel is very big and it can store<br />
__________ seeds.<br />
10 Listen once more and answer these questions.<br />
a. What nationality are the scientists developing the Doomsday Vault?<br />
b. What does Doomsday mean in old English, Judgement day or Salvation<br />
day?<br />
c. How long may the seeds in the vault last?
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
11 Use the information you collected in the listening activities to label this<br />
illustration.<br />
a. Name of the place<br />
_____________<br />
c. Location<br />
_____________<br />
12 Ask and answer these questions in your group. Share and compare your<br />
conclusions with your classmates.<br />
a. What Chilean seeds would you store in the Doomsday Vault?<br />
b. If you were a modern Noah, what animals would / wouldn't you save?<br />
b. Types of vegetables<br />
_____________<br />
d. Capacity<br />
_____________<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
159
160<br />
UNIT 5<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Modal verbs must / have to<br />
1. Read these sentences from the text.<br />
a. Do we have to prepare for a flood?<br />
b. Do we have to build a boat?<br />
c. We have to prepare for global warming.<br />
d. We must do something to prevent the disaster.<br />
2. What difference do you notice between must and have to?<br />
The modal verb must does not use to, while the modal verb have to<br />
does.<br />
a. Obligation b. Possibility c. Suggestion<br />
Both modals express obligation.<br />
We use have to in the past, present and future tenses to express<br />
responsibility, necessity or obligation made for us by somebody or<br />
something else.<br />
We use must to express something that is considered very necessary<br />
or a strong obligation.<br />
3. What do these modal verbs express?<br />
Here are more examples:<br />
I wish you were here.<br />
It's so hot today. I wish we had a cold drink.<br />
4. Revise the information you collected in the listening activities and write<br />
two more sentences expressing our obligations in connection with a<br />
possible future disaster.<br />
13 Fill in the gaps in these sentences with must or have to in the correct form.<br />
a. Look here, young lady, you ______________ be home before midnight.<br />
Do you understand?<br />
b. He __________________ take a bus today because his car broke down.<br />
c. We _____________________________ be more careful with our planet.<br />
d. I _____________________________________ go now. It is getting late.<br />
e. ______________________________________ catch the 5 o’clock train?<br />
14 Look at these traffic signs. What must you do in each case?<br />
1 2 3 4 5
HAVE A CHAT<br />
15 In your notebook, copy and complete this conversation about<br />
helping to protect the planet. Then check with the recording.<br />
Elizabeth: So, what do you think we should do?<br />
Howard: __________ less energy.<br />
Elizabeth: And what could we do at school?<br />
Howard: __________ recycle soft drink cans.<br />
Elizabeth: How about planting trees in the school garden?<br />
Howard: First __________ collect some money.<br />
Elizabeth: Do you think we could prepare an ecological newsletter?<br />
Howard: Good idea, but we __________ find someone to write it.<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
16 Deborah’s parents are going on a short holiday. They have left her a list<br />
of things she has to do while they are away. Write the complete<br />
sentences. (10 points)<br />
a. Answer the phone and write down messages<br />
b. Buy food at the supermarket<br />
c. Check all doors before going out<br />
d. Clean and tidy up before we arrive.<br />
e. Feed the cat<br />
f. Phone grandparents<br />
g. Switch off lights before going to bed<br />
h. Take out the rubbish<br />
i. Take the dog out for a walk<br />
j. Water the plants<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
17 Write a list of things you have to do every day. Compare with another student.<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
161
1<br />
2<br />
162<br />
Tonga, the African country produces lots of fruits and vegetables. Look at the graph and say how many<br />
tons of each product were produced in the month of June.<br />
Example: Twenty tons of mango were produced in Tonga in June.<br />
Each fruit was sent to a different country. Look at the table below and write sentences to indicate the<br />
destination of the fruit. Investigate the country the flag represents and how to say and write the plural<br />
of the fruit.<br />
Example: Cherries were sent to the United Kingdom<br />
UNIT 5<br />
Orange 15
3<br />
4<br />
Digby Jones was ill – he had his appendix taken out. Read his doctor’s instructions and write sentences<br />
in your notebook.<br />
Example:<br />
Digby must rest for three days.<br />
He should get up on the 4th day.<br />
Patient: Digby Jones<br />
Post-operation instructions:<br />
Must Should<br />
Rest for 3 days get up on day 4<br />
Dr. Stanley Smith<br />
Avoid too much effort Do light exercise on day 4<br />
Eat 3 small meals a day drink lots of water<br />
Avoid carbohydrates eat fresh fruit and vegetables<br />
Visit doctor in a week go back to work in 2 weeks<br />
Look at the pictures and say / write what each person would like to do / be.<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
Camila Dennis Stella Bruce<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
163
READING - UP FOR A DRIVE!<br />
I know it is hard to believe but<br />
it must be true because my<br />
father told me this story, and<br />
my father never lies. When he<br />
was a child my father lived in<br />
the mining town of<br />
Antofagasta, far in the north of<br />
our country. His parents had a<br />
small house with a tiny garden<br />
and next door lived a young<br />
man called Esteban who was a<br />
mining engineer. The mine<br />
was quite far from the city of<br />
Antofagasta and Esteban had<br />
to drive to work nearly 80<br />
kilometres each day. His car<br />
was very small and very old<br />
and it always made a lot of<br />
strange noises. So one day<br />
early in the morning, when<br />
Esteban left home to go to<br />
work he turned on the engine<br />
and he was not surprised to<br />
hear that it started making a<br />
164<br />
1 Read the text and answer these questions.<br />
a. Why does the narrator believe the story is true?<br />
b. Where did the narrator’s dad live when he / she was a child?<br />
c. How far did Esteban drive his car?<br />
d. What did the owner of the car have to do at the end of the story?<br />
e. Why?<br />
5 pts.<br />
UNIT 5<br />
strange purring noise, just like<br />
a cat. He turned on the radio<br />
and drove happily for many<br />
kilometres, ignoring the funny<br />
noise. Next day, when he got<br />
into the car, there was the<br />
noise again! And this time the<br />
purring was even stronger.<br />
“I wish I had a new car”,<br />
Esteban thought. “I would<br />
like to have a shiny new Ford<br />
or a Jeep.”<br />
After a while the noise got<br />
louder.<br />
“It must be the engine. I have<br />
to take it to the garage and<br />
get it checked”, he said to<br />
himself.<br />
The third day the car purred<br />
even more and this time<br />
Esteban got really curious.<br />
Engines, even old ones, don’t<br />
usually purr! He stopped at<br />
the side of the road and<br />
opened the bonnet of the car.<br />
Can you imagine his surprise<br />
when he saw two scared<br />
yellow eyes looking up at<br />
him? It was Lottie, my dad’s<br />
cat stuck between the engine<br />
and the water tank! It took<br />
Esteban nearly three hours to<br />
remove the water tank and<br />
free the terrified kitty! And he<br />
was late to work, but my dad<br />
was really grateful for getting<br />
his pet back safe and sound.<br />
Source: adapted from: www.ananova.com
2 Find words in the text that correspond to these descriptions.<br />
a. A part of a car or another machine that makes the car or machine move.<br />
b. The hood of a car.<br />
c. A noise a cat usually makes.<br />
d. Really scared.<br />
4 pts.<br />
LISTENING - CLOUDS<br />
3 Listen to the class and answer these questions.<br />
a. What are clouds made of?<br />
b. What is water as a gas called?<br />
c. What is condensation?<br />
d. How many types of clouds are mentioned?<br />
4 Listen again and complete the sentences.<br />
a. High clouds are called __________.<br />
b. Clouds that produce snow are called __________.<br />
c. Clouds named because of their appearance are __________ and __________.<br />
d. Middle clouds are called __________.<br />
LANGUAGE<br />
5 Re-write these sentences to form a paragraph about recycling paper using the Passive<br />
Voice. Use sequence words such as first, second, next, etc.<br />
• The school collects all unwanted paper in big cardboard boxes.<br />
• A charity truck collects the boxes and takes the paper to a recycling plant.<br />
• In the plant, a machine mixes the paper with water and chemicals and converts it into a pulp.<br />
• A press removes the water from the pulp.<br />
• Chemicals remove colouring and hard parts from the pulp.<br />
• Another machine converts the pulp into sheets of recycled paper.<br />
6 Insert the definite article the where necessary.<br />
a. ________ Mount Everest is the highest mountain on earth, and the highest mountain<br />
range in the world are ________ Himalayas.<br />
b. ________ Loch Ness is a famous lake in ________ Scotland.<br />
c. The longest river in ________ Chile is ________ Bío Bío.<br />
d. Easter Island is in ________ Pacific Ocean.<br />
e. The shoe shop is in ________ Elm Street.<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
4 pts.<br />
5 pts.<br />
6 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
165
7<br />
8<br />
166<br />
Three friends are celebrating their birthday on the same day. Read each friend’s<br />
description and choose the most appropriate presents. Complete the sentences using<br />
ought to and might.<br />
Gabriella is sporty; she plays tennis or goes swimming every day.<br />
Diana likes to read detective novels and she is a good painter.<br />
Becky is interested in classical music and loves to see modern plays.<br />
1 2 3 4 5 6<br />
a. We ______________ for Gabriella. She ______________.<br />
b. We ______________ for Diana. She ______________.<br />
c. We ______________ for Becky. She ______________.<br />
Provide instructions for the situations in the pictures using must / have to.<br />
1 2 3<br />
a. _______________ (put) b. _____________ (hurry) c. _______________ (call)<br />
SPEAKING<br />
9 Look at the pictures and complete the conversations according to the situations. Role play<br />
the conversations with a partner.<br />
I'm _____<br />
Excuse me,<br />
Would you<br />
_____! I didn't<br />
could you<br />
_____?<br />
see you.<br />
_______?<br />
1 2 3<br />
UNIT 5<br />
Sorry, I don't<br />
________<br />
Sorry, there's<br />
no more space.<br />
That's Ok.<br />
3 pts.<br />
3 pts.<br />
8 pts.
WRITING<br />
10 Write a short paragraph about the things you want to do, must do, should do and need to<br />
do during the next few months.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________<br />
___________________________________________________________________________<br />
___________________________________________________________________________<br />
___________________________________________________________________________<br />
___________________________________________________________________________<br />
___________________________________________________________________________<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
1 - 12<br />
Not too good<br />
FINAL CHECK ✔ ✔<br />
Choose one alternative according to your performance.<br />
Speaking<br />
· I use English structures correctly.<br />
· I use varied and correct vocabulary.<br />
· Others can understand me.<br />
Writing<br />
· My writing is coherent and follows the central idea.<br />
· I use the correct sentence formation and sentence structure<br />
· I use the correct spelling, punctuation, capitalisation and format.<br />
Reading<br />
· I am aware of the differences in tenses, gender and number.<br />
· I can identify the main idea and understand the text as a whole.<br />
· I can locate details and look for specific information.<br />
Listening<br />
· I can get the general idea.<br />
· I understand the details and identify speakers.<br />
· I identify the source of the text and listening and recognise the format.<br />
Group work<br />
· I share my ideas with the group.<br />
· I listen to and respect my partners’ points of view.<br />
· I help solve problems and contribute with relevant information.<br />
13 - 24<br />
Acceptable<br />
Always<br />
Nearly Always<br />
Sometimes<br />
Never<br />
25 - 50<br />
Great!<br />
Total<br />
50 pts.<br />
Use this clue to work out your score<br />
Never = 0<br />
Sometimes = 1<br />
Nearly Always = 2<br />
Always = 3<br />
If you get:<br />
0 - 10 = Watch out! You must look back<br />
and review the whole unit. Ask your<br />
teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
11 - 22 = Not too bad, but there are<br />
areas you still have problems with.<br />
Identify those areas and ask your<br />
teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
23 - 34 = You are doing fine, but you<br />
can certainly do better. Get together<br />
with a classmate and review your weak<br />
points.<br />
35 - 45 = Congratulations! Great<br />
progress - you may look ahead to the<br />
new unit and help your classmates who<br />
need to review.<br />
LIFE AS WE KNOW IT<br />
8 pts.<br />
167
168<br />
IN THIS UNIT YOU WILL LEARN TO:<br />
Reading: Identify the general topic of different texts / Match<br />
visual and written information / Fill in a graphic organiser with<br />
specific information / Follow directions to draw a picture<br />
Listening: Match oral instructions with visual clues / Identify<br />
expressions referring to the duration of events / Identify speakers /<br />
Complete a gap exercise with specific words<br />
Production: Express personal opinions and ideas about traditions<br />
and celebrations / Talk about cultural differences in your country /<br />
Express interest, surprise, happiness in different situation / Offer<br />
predictions for future events<br />
Functions: Referring to the duration of events / Expressing obligation /<br />
Expressing interest, surprise, joy / Making predictions for the future<br />
YOU WILL USE THE FOLLOWING TEXT TYPES:<br />
Reading: An email / A Christmas carol / An advertisement /<br />
A website entry<br />
Listening: An interview / A lecture<br />
YOU WILL ALSO LEARN:<br />
Grammar: The Present Prefect Tense / The use of since, for, never,<br />
ever, just now / Reported Speech / The Simple Future Tense<br />
Vocabulary: Vocabulary related to holidays, festivals and<br />
celebrations / Vocabulary related to different cultures<br />
YOU WILL PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THESE VALUES:<br />
Why we should respect and follow traditions
SET UP<br />
1<br />
2<br />
Match the traditions (a. - h.) with the pictures (1 - 8)<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
5 6 7 8<br />
a. A birthday party<br />
b. A camel race<br />
c. A wedding ceremony<br />
d. Easter<br />
e. Guy Fawkes<br />
f. Halloween<br />
g. La Tirana festival<br />
h. New Year's celebrations<br />
Which activities in the pictures are traditional in Chile? Do you celebrate / practise them in your family /<br />
region?<br />
3 Why are traditions important? Exchange opinions about the following points in your group.<br />
a. The value of traditions comes from what they can give each person.<br />
b. Traditions keep memories alive.<br />
c. Traditions preserve national and family values.<br />
d. Traditions give us an identity as a group: family, nation, race, etc.<br />
e. Traditions provide a rest period in a stressful life.<br />
12:00<br />
169
Mind<br />
170<br />
LET'S CELEBRATE<br />
READING<br />
UNIT 6<br />
T ea s er<br />
I hatched<br />
from an<br />
Easter Egg.<br />
1<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Match the words (a. - c.) with their definition (i. - iii.).<br />
a. celebration b. festival c. party<br />
2<br />
Lesson 1<br />
3 Match the questions in A with the answers in B to form three short dialogues.<br />
A B<br />
a. Have you been waiting long? i. We've been friends since<br />
primary school.<br />
b. How long have you known John? ii. We stayed a week at the<br />
seaside and five days doing<br />
things at home.<br />
c. So how long was your holiday? iii. For about twenty minutes.<br />
4<br />
i. an occasion for celebrating, especially a day or time of religious<br />
significance that happens at regular intervals<br />
ii. a social gathering of many people who meet for pleasure or amusement<br />
iii. the act of showing joy and happiness at a special event<br />
Which of the words in the box look or sound similar in Spanish? Check<br />
the meaning of the other words in a dictionary.<br />
· celebrate · colloquial · comfort · decorate<br />
· evil · ignorance · remotely · scary · victory<br />
You will read four texts about different festivals and celebrations. Look at<br />
the cards and guess what the festivals are about.<br />
1 2 3 4
5<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Read the texts on pages 172 and 173 quickly and check your predictions<br />
in Exercise 4.<br />
6 What type of texts are those? Choose one alternative for each text.<br />
a. An advertisement. b. An article.<br />
c. A carol / christmas song. d. An e-mail.<br />
7 What is the general topic of all the texts?<br />
a. Festivals and celebrations in different parts of the world.<br />
b. Holidays and parties in English-speaking countries.<br />
c. Traditional activities common to all parts of the world.<br />
8<br />
Match the pictures (1 - 3) with the sentences taken from the texts (a. - c.).<br />
1 2 3<br />
a.<br />
Join us this<br />
time and have<br />
some fun with the<br />
Marching Band.<br />
9<br />
10<br />
b.<br />
Every household burns<br />
special Diwali clay lamps to light the<br />
way for the goddess Houses, shops,<br />
and public places are decorated<br />
with small oil lamps<br />
called diyas.<br />
Read the texts again and tick the correct column or columns.<br />
Which text mentions<br />
the participation of a family member?<br />
the name of a goddess?<br />
the name of a saint?<br />
the reason for the celebration?<br />
the exact date and time of the celebration?<br />
I II<br />
c.<br />
I'm a<br />
scary witch<br />
One of the texts uses very informal language. Which one? Can you give a<br />
few examples from that text?<br />
11 Fill in the gaps in these sentences with words from the texts.<br />
· favourite · popular · tradition · costume<br />
a. The festival has been a great ___________ with children.<br />
b. It has been one of the most __________ festivals in India.<br />
c. Each Halloween we make scary __________ to go trick and treating.<br />
d. They have celebrated this great Irish __________for many centuries.<br />
III<br />
IV<br />
Danger<br />
Costume versus custom<br />
Watch out for the use of<br />
these two words. Study these<br />
examples.<br />
a. Ayelen, our model, is<br />
wearing a typical<br />
Mapuche costume which<br />
includes a headband<br />
called trarilonko and silver<br />
earrings called chaway.<br />
b. One of the most important<br />
Chilean customs is the<br />
celebration of<br />
Independence Day on<br />
18 th September.<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
171
III.<br />
I.<br />
II.<br />
172<br />
I’ve seen mummy kissing Santa Claus<br />
Underneath the mistletoe.<br />
She can’t see me go down the stairs to peek,<br />
I should be up in my bedroom,<br />
In my bed fast asleep<br />
Lisa<br />
Great time at Halloween!<br />
UNIT 6<br />
LET'S CELEBRATE<br />
Diwali, the Hindu festival of lights, has been for centuries the most popular of all the festivals im South Asia. It is a<br />
five - day celebration which occurs on the fifteenth day of the Hindu month of Kartika (during October / November<br />
in our calendar). The fourth day of Diwali is the Hindu New Year. The word Diwali means “rows of lighted lamps”<br />
because people light hundreds of small oil lamps (called diyas) They place them around the home, in courtyards<br />
and in gardens, as well as on roof-tops and outer walls. The festival of lights is held in honour of Lakshmi, the<br />
Hindu goddess of wealth and prosperity. Hindus pray to Lakshmi to bring them good luck in the coming year.<br />
Homes are cleaned to welcome the New Year and windows are opened so that Lakshmi can enter them. It is<br />
believed that she cannot enter a house which is not lit up, so every household burns special Diwali clay lamps to<br />
light the way for the goddess. For many years this festival has been very popular with children because they have<br />
a holiday from school. Additionally, for many years now people have used colourful fireworks so children are really<br />
delighted with the noise and colours. And apart from that, kids get presents and adults cook delicious holiday<br />
food. New clothes and jewellery are worn, many parties are organised and games are played. The last day of the<br />
holiday is a special day for brothers and sisters. Brothers give special presents to their sisters, who cook for them<br />
and look after them. But most importantly the festival celebrates the victory of good over evil, light over darkness,<br />
and knowledge over ignorance.<br />
Then I’ve seen my mummy tickle Santa Claus<br />
Underneath his beard so snowy white.<br />
What a laugh it would be<br />
If daddy could only see<br />
Mommy kissing Santa Claus tonight!<br />
Friday, 31 October, 2008 10: 17 PM<br />
Hi Lisa,<br />
How are you? Finally it’s Halloween! Have you done anything spooky today? Have you dressed up and gone<br />
trick or treating? Because I’ve had a blast! In fact, it’s been so great I could burst like a bubble! To start with<br />
we’ve made some really awesome costumes! I’m a scary witch and my sister Jenna’s a fairy. And I have<br />
eaten so many sweets that I think I am going to get sick. Both Jenna and I’ve got so many yummy things<br />
that we’d better leave some for next week.<br />
We have not visited all the houses in our street yet and I can see other kids walking around with their<br />
goodie bags so I’d better run or all the sweeties will be gone. Love and XXXXX
IV.<br />
2009 New York City Saint Patrick's Day Parade<br />
Tuesday, March 17 th , 2009 11:00 a.m. Starting @ 44 th Street and Fifth Avenue<br />
So far, the Traditional New York Parade has marched 247 times - this year we are marching once again. How<br />
many times have you watched us on TV from the comfort of your sitting room? How many times have you<br />
wanted to be part of us? So come and join us this time and have some fun with the Marching Band.<br />
Year after year we have celebrated this great Irish tradition right in the heart of New York. This time, come<br />
and celebrate with us. Be proud of your Irish roots - be part of this great festival.<br />
For those of you who are not Irish, we should explain why we celebrate. Saint Patrick's Day, colloquially St.<br />
Paddy's Day or Paddy's Day, is an annual festivity which has for centuries celebrated Saint Patrick, one of<br />
Ireland's patron saints.<br />
Get up! Get out! Put on your leprechaun suit! Fly your Irish flag!<br />
Come and join us in this wonderful festival of peace and joy.<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
The Present Perfect<br />
1. Read these sentences from the texts.<br />
a. Diwali has been for centuries the most popular of all the festivals<br />
from South Asia.<br />
b. We have not visited all the houses in our street yet.<br />
c. How many times have you wanted to be part of us?<br />
2. Which time do the sentences express?<br />
a. The past b. The present c. Neither<br />
3. The sentences in Point 1 use the Present Perfect tense, which indicates<br />
that an action happened at an unspecified time before now; the exact<br />
time is not important.<br />
4. We CANNOT use the Present Perfect with specific time expressions such<br />
as: yesterday, one year ago, last week, when I was a child, when I lived in<br />
Japan, at that moment, that day, one day, etc. We CAN use the Present<br />
Perfect with unspecific expressions such as: ever, never, once, many<br />
times, several times, before, so far, already, just, yet, etc.<br />
5. Examine the structure and the examples.<br />
Subject + has / have (not) + past participle<br />
We haven't seen that film yet.<br />
Tina has made lovely costumes.<br />
6. Go back to the text and find more examples of the Present Perfect<br />
tense. Identify the elements and copy them into your notebook. Use<br />
color pencils to identify the components.<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
173
174<br />
UNIT 6<br />
12 Tom Warwick has travelled to a lot of countries. Look at his passport and<br />
answer the questions.<br />
a. Has Tom visited Poland? b. Has he been to Russia?<br />
c. Has he visited the Czech Republic? d. Has he been to Latin America?<br />
e. Has he been to Switzerland? f. Has he visited the USA?<br />
g. Has he been to Great Britain? h. How many countries has Tom been to?<br />
Great Britain<br />
31 - 01 - 2008<br />
U S A<br />
9 - 9 - 2004<br />
1-10-2005<br />
C e s k á r e p u b l i k a<br />
Jugoslavija<br />
6 - 12 - 2007<br />
25 - 08 - 2007 Suisse<br />
P o c c h r<br />
9-9-2004<br />
13 Complete this paragraph with the correct form of the Present Perfect<br />
tense (affirmative, negative or interrogative).<br />
The Christmas tree today is a common custom to most of us, but<br />
a. __________ (you ever wonder) about its origin? When did the tradition<br />
start? How long b. __________ (it last)? We now know that c. __________<br />
(it be) around as a tradition for many centuries. One of the most<br />
important aspects of the Christmas tree is its colour. For years, having a<br />
green tree full of lights inside your home d. __________ (symbolise) life<br />
in the middle of a cold winter. Probably there is no one on the planet who<br />
e. __________ (not hear) about the Christmas tree tradition.<br />
14 Work with a partner. Read the results table and ask each other questions.<br />
Examples: How many games has Man United played in total? They have<br />
played 6 games in total.<br />
How many games have they won and lost? They have won 4<br />
games and lost 2.<br />
Team<br />
Total games<br />
played<br />
Games won Games lost<br />
Manchester United 6 4 2<br />
West Ham<br />
5 3 2<br />
Chelsea<br />
6 5 1<br />
Liverpool<br />
7 4 3<br />
Sheffield United<br />
5 2 3
HAVE A CHAT<br />
15 Listen to the recording and practise saying these questions. Then ask<br />
and answer them with a partner.<br />
a. How long is the Chilean National Day celebration?<br />
b. How long have you known your best friend?<br />
c. How many days a week do you go to school?<br />
d. How long does it take to go from your house to your school?<br />
e. How long have you studied English?<br />
f. How long have your parents lived in the same house?<br />
g. How many hours have you spent at school today?<br />
h. How long has it taken you to answer all the questions?<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
16 Today is Monday, December 8 and Mrs Carlow has planned many things to<br />
do. Look at a page from her diary and write sentences about the things she<br />
has already done (✔) and the things she has not done yet (✘). (10 points)<br />
Monday, 8 December 2008<br />
✔ Take children to school ✔ Write e-mail to Lucy's teacher<br />
✔ Buy Christmas decorations ✘ Send Christmas cards<br />
✔ Visit James in hospital ✘ Make chocolate cake for tea<br />
✘ Go jogging in park<br />
✔ Read the papers<br />
✔ Call Susan about party ✘ Collect children from school<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
17 Does your family celebrate some kind of tradition or festival? What is it?<br />
How long does it last? Since when have you celebrated it? Write a short<br />
paragraph about why you celebrate it and how.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
175
176<br />
PROUD TO BE<br />
LISTENING<br />
UNIT 6<br />
1<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Lesson 2<br />
Who are these native inhabitants of Chile? What are the names of their<br />
ethnic groups?<br />
1 2 3<br />
2<br />
3<br />
Locate each group in the corresponding part of Chile.<br />
The following words are taken from the text you are going to listen to. All<br />
the vowels (a, e, i ,o ,u) have been removed. Can you guess the words and<br />
put the vowels back? Write the correct words in your notebook and check<br />
their meaning in a dictionary.<br />
a. r __ __ t s b. __ r __ g __ n c. t __ t t __ __<br />
d. __ m __ g __ s e. c __ l t __ r __ e. s p __ r __ t __ __ l
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
Three young people are talking to British anthropologist Jane Roberts<br />
about their customs and traditions. Can you guess which ethnic group each<br />
of them represents from these sentences taken from the conversation?<br />
a. That's why we have the Machi.<br />
b. We've always been known for our respect for Mother Earth.<br />
c. Polynesian symbols and figures from our legends.<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Listen to the conversation and check your predictions in Exercise 4.<br />
Each speaker mentions three traditions. Listen again and identify the<br />
tradition from the pictures (i. or ii.)<br />
a. Ariki i. ii.<br />
b. Millaray i. ii.<br />
c. Urichi i. ii.<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
177
178<br />
UNIT 6<br />
7<br />
Listen again and write the name of the speaker, Ariki, Millaray,<br />
Urushi, or Jane.<br />
a. _______: I think it's important to know where you come from.<br />
b. _______: We ought to know our roots.<br />
c. _______: I've heard of the ancient cult to the Pachamama.<br />
d. _______: This month we are celebrating an important holiday<br />
e. _______: I've never been to the north but I know it's very dry.<br />
f. _______: It also brings our people together.<br />
g. _______: It's always been important to look after both the body and<br />
the soul<br />
8<br />
Listen again and complete these sentences.<br />
a. How do you feel about your __________________________________?<br />
b. Millaray means ____________, Ariki means ____________ and Uruchi<br />
means ____________.<br />
c. ____________ make our skin sacred and help us __________________.<br />
d. This cult has helped my people to ______________________________.<br />
e. We are certain that the most common __________________________.<br />
9 Listen once more and find the answer to these questions.<br />
a. What kind of pictures do Rapa Nui tattoo artists use?<br />
b. What is the name of the Aymara holiday mentioned?<br />
c. According to Millaray, what happens when your mind is not well?<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
The Present Perfect - continued<br />
1. Read these sentences from the text.<br />
a. I've been a tattoo artist since I was sixteen.<br />
b. For centuries we have believed that tattoos make our skin sacred.<br />
2. What do you notice about the use of for and since?<br />
We use for with a period of time, for example: a few days, half an hour,<br />
two years.<br />
We use since with the time when the action started, for example: last<br />
year, June 8, when I met you.<br />
3. Pay attention to the structure and examples.<br />
Subject + has/ have + (not) + past participle<br />
Our people have lived here for thousands<br />
of years.<br />
They have lived here since<br />
prehistoric times.
10<br />
Complete sentences a.- d. with for or since according to the clues (i. - ii.).<br />
a. I haven't phoned home (i.) __________ Christmas,<br />
(ii.) __________ three weeks now.<br />
b. She has been here (i.) __________ half and hour now,<br />
(ii.) __________ 9.15 a.m.<br />
c. George has lived in Madrid (i.) __________ a very long time,<br />
(ii.) __________ 1982.<br />
d. Amelia has been my best friend (i.) __________ kindergarten,<br />
(ii.) __________ almost twenty years.<br />
11 Choose the best reply (i. - iii.) in these short dialogues.<br />
a. A: Have you ever been to Arica?<br />
B: i. Yes, of course I can.<br />
ii. No, I didn‘t.<br />
iii. Yes, I travel a lot.<br />
b. A: What have you made for dinner?<br />
B: i. I ate some spaghetti.<br />
ii. Meat? I don't like meat.<br />
iii. Glenn and I have prepared some pasta.<br />
c. A: He's been a tattoo artist for five years, hasn't he?<br />
B: i. No, he's been in this business for much longer.<br />
ii. Yes, he is an artist.<br />
iii. No, he doesn't do this.<br />
d. A: You've bought a computer! How great!<br />
B. i. Our old one is good.<br />
ii. And I've learned how to use it, too.<br />
iii. No, it's very small.<br />
e. A: How long have you been here?<br />
B: i. I came last month.<br />
ii. No, I've come just now.<br />
iii. Yes, five hours ago.<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
179
180<br />
UNIT 6<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
12<br />
Jane and Millaray are talking during the morning break. Use the<br />
information you collected in the listening exercises and your imagination<br />
to complete it.<br />
Jane: Have you ever been to see a Machi?<br />
Millaray: _____________________________________________________<br />
Jane: How long have you lived in Santiago?<br />
Millaray: _____________________________________________________<br />
Jane: Have you already seen most of Santiago?<br />
Millaray: _____________________________________________________<br />
Jane: Have you been back to see you relatives in the south?<br />
Millaray: _____________________________________________________<br />
Jane: How many hours does it take to get there?<br />
Millaray: _____________________________________________________<br />
Jane: Have you done anything interesting recently?<br />
Millaray: _____________________________________________________<br />
Jane: And what have you done just now?<br />
Millaray: _____________________________________________________<br />
13 Listen to the recording and check your answers. Practise the<br />
conversation with a partner and then role play it in front of your<br />
classmates.<br />
FAST CHECK<br />
14<br />
Use the clues provided to write sentences using the Present Perfect<br />
tense and for or since. (10 points)<br />
a. I - know Sebastian - we were in primary school.<br />
b. We - discuss the plans for the party - five weeks.<br />
c. This festival - be popular with school children - a long time.<br />
d. We - look for the information - the teacher gave us the questions.<br />
e. Frances - study Spanish - two years.<br />
f. Peter - do karate - he was a little boy.<br />
g. Harry and Kim - be on the island - three weeks.<br />
h. Tammy - play chess - she was 12.<br />
i. Rick - live in Japan - two months.<br />
j. My parents - work in the same school - they finished university.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
15 Look at the picture below. What kind of tradition /<br />
custom is it? Do some internet research and write a<br />
paragraph about it. Present it to the class. Compare<br />
your presentations.<br />
PLAY IT<br />
Play the BLIP game (sometimes known as COFFEE POT).<br />
1. Play in groups of six students.<br />
2. Choose a verb from the box below that indicates something that you have done recently.<br />
3. The group must discover the verb through YES / NO questions using mainly the Present Perfect<br />
tense, but other tenses can be accepted.<br />
4. The nonsense word "BLIP" should replace your chosen verb until a player asks a question using<br />
the real verb. If this is correct, it is that player's turn to choose a verb.<br />
5. The aim of the game is not to guess the meaning of the word "Blip" straight away. When you<br />
think you know the meaning of the word "Blip", you could ask further questions which make the<br />
meaning of the word "Blip" clear to the rest of the group or which amuse the student who is<br />
answering the questions.<br />
Here are some sample questions.<br />
• Have you blipped in the living-room / dining room / garden / street / kitchen / in a restaurant?<br />
• Have you blipped with a friend / your teacher / your family / alone ?<br />
• Have you blipped since you arrived at school / in the last twenty-four hours / this month / this year?<br />
• Do you feel tired / happy / sad / angry / hungry / thirsty after you have blipped?<br />
• Do you like blipping?<br />
• Do you often blip?<br />
• Did you blip yesterday?<br />
• Are you blipping now?<br />
· cook · cry · dance · draw · dream · drink · drive · eat · fight · fly<br />
· iron · joke · jump · kiss · knit · move · paint · read · rest · run<br />
· scream · sew · shout · sing · sleep · smile · swim · talk · think · win<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Listening<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
181
182<br />
LIVING WITH TRADITIONS<br />
READING<br />
1 2<br />
UNIT 6<br />
1<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Where is Spunky, the monkey?<br />
5 6<br />
· above · behind · between · far from · in<br />
· in front of · in the middle · near · on · under<br />
3 4<br />
8 9 10<br />
Lesson 3<br />
2 Now fill in the gaps with the correct preposition of place.<br />
a. The Fiat was parked _____________ a Suzuki and a Honda.<br />
b. Can you move please? I can‘t see! You are right _____________ of the TV.<br />
c. Where is Puerto Varas? Is it _____________ from Antofagasta?<br />
d. We were looking for the cat and found it _____________ the car.<br />
7
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
Match the expressions in the bubbles (a. - c.) with the pictures (1 - 3).<br />
a. How<br />
interesting! I have<br />
never seen a<br />
watermelon<br />
that big.<br />
b.<br />
That's really<br />
awful! Some people<br />
have no respect for<br />
their environment.<br />
1 2 3<br />
Which objects from the picture would you choose to decorate your room?<br />
Match the professionals in the box with the descriptions (a. - e.).<br />
· architect · carpenter · house painter<br />
· interior decorator · landscape artist<br />
c.<br />
How funny!<br />
The shirt looks as if<br />
it was made for a<br />
giant!<br />
a. person who specialises in designing interiors and furnishings<br />
b. someone who creates plans to be used in making something (such as<br />
buildings, houses, etc.)<br />
c. person who paints walls and ceilings<br />
d. skilled worker who makes, finishes, and repairs wooden objects<br />
e. person who specialises in designing gardens and outdoor spaces<br />
Which profession(s) do you think will be mentioned in a text about living<br />
in a traditional home?<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
183
184<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Sunday, 29 September 2008<br />
Decorators Weekly<br />
Modernity mixed with traditions<br />
By Glenda Spurns<br />
As readers already know every week we visit a traditional<br />
home where history and modernity can be found side by side.<br />
This week, however, is quite different as the home we visited<br />
belongs to a famous decorator, Lawrence Goody, who has just<br />
been named Decorator of the Year. Congratulations, Lawrence!<br />
Lawrence has worked for many famous people including some<br />
television personalities, politicians and singers. For obvious<br />
reasons we cannot give you all the names, but Lawrence told<br />
us he was the personal decorator for the British Prime Ministers<br />
and that he decorated Number 10 Downing Street. He said<br />
that it was really challenging as each new Prime Minister had<br />
a different taste. He said that some were more traditional while<br />
others liked more modern types of decoration.<br />
This house has belonged to the Goody family for nearly<br />
two centuries and Lawrence inherited it from his father,<br />
who was a painter. In our interview Lawrence told us that<br />
he loved the traditional decoration of his home but his<br />
modern education at the London School of Design<br />
required some modern touches. So he invited us to see<br />
how he was changing some parts of the house to suit his<br />
modern taste. Lawrence also told us that he wanted to<br />
make his traditional home more user-friendly. He is the<br />
father of two teenagers who often invite friends, so he<br />
wanted to adapt the house for younger people.<br />
Glenda: So, what can we see in this room?<br />
Lawrence: Well, this is our family room. It’s a typical 5<br />
x 4 metre rectangular room with basic beige and white<br />
colours where there is one good-sized window that<br />
overlooks the garden.<br />
Glenda: And what are we going to see today?<br />
Lawrence: When we’ve finished we’ll have a charming<br />
place where the whole family can relax and feel they<br />
want to spend quality time together.<br />
Glenda: How nice! Do you have a plan?<br />
Lawrence: First of all, I’m going to ask Andy, the painter<br />
to remove all the old wallpaper that has been on these walls<br />
22<br />
UNIT 6<br />
for goodness knows how long.<br />
Probably since my father put it<br />
there 50 years ago! The design of the<br />
wallpaper is typical of the 50's – that’s what people liked<br />
at the time. I do have respect for traditions but this<br />
wallpaper must go down! We‘re going to paint the walls<br />
light green. It’s going to be our canvass to work on.<br />
Glenda: How interesting! Can you tell us more?<br />
Lawrence: Then we're going to remove the carpet and<br />
the carpenter’s going to put wooden floors in with a dark<br />
green rug in the middle of the room.<br />
Glenda: Are you going to leave the sofa and armchairs here?<br />
Lawrence: The sofa should stand between two lamps<br />
by the wall opposite the window and I'm going to put the<br />
armchairs in front of the window, with the beautiful<br />
sculpture next to the one near the door. Can you picture it<br />
in your mind? The room is still quite traditional because of<br />
its size and the high ceilings but we are adding some of<br />
the modern touches that I like so much.<br />
Glenda: What are you going to do with the piano?<br />
Lawrence: The piano's an antique - you see that I<br />
respect traditions? I'm going to put it in the middle of the<br />
room and I'm going to put a crystal vase with roses on it.<br />
The whole decoration process took a long time and at the<br />
end of the day we were all very tired. I must tell you I was<br />
surprised at some of Lawrence’s decisions. For example, he<br />
told us he would not put any curtains in the window<br />
because that way he could see the garden much better<br />
from the room. He said that the landscape artist did a very<br />
good job with the plants in the garden and he told me that<br />
he liked watching the sunset in the evening.<br />
Altogether it was a very interesting experience. The room<br />
definitely looks completely different from what it was<br />
when we arrived. we first saw it. Later we asked<br />
Lawrence if his teenage sons were happy with the change<br />
and he said that they both loved it.<br />
Fuente: Based on the BBC programme: “Changing Rooms”, with Lawrence Llewellyn-Bowen.
7<br />
8<br />
Read the text and check your predictions in Exercise 6.<br />
As you can see the text is written in two different colours. How are the<br />
two parts different? Why?<br />
9 Read the text again and answer these questions.<br />
a. What do we learn about Lawrence from this text?<br />
b. Was there wallpaper or paint on the walls originally?<br />
c. Why is Glenda congratulating Lawrence?<br />
d. Why will Lawrence not put any curtains?<br />
10 Copy this rectangle into your notebook but make it bigger. Read the text<br />
again to complete it.<br />
a. Colour the walls the correct colour.<br />
b. Place the furniture and objects in the places where Lawrence will put them.<br />
c. Compare your picture with the plan on page 187.<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
window<br />
11 Complete the conversation using the expressions in the bubbles (a. - e.).<br />
a.<br />
You should<br />
b.<br />
How<br />
interesting!<br />
c.<br />
I’m so glad.<br />
d.<br />
How awful!<br />
e.<br />
What a pity!<br />
Donna: Last week I had nothing to do so I decided to visit the Design<br />
Museum to see the new interior decoration exhibition.<br />
Rose: _____________________________________________________<br />
Donna: And I booked and paid for my tickets on-line. But when I got to the<br />
museum the tickets were not there!<br />
Rose _____________________________________________________<br />
Donna: I spoke to the man in the ticket office and he told me to ask the<br />
manager. And fortunately the tickets were in his office.<br />
Rose _____________________________________________________<br />
Donna: Yes, so I finally got to see the Victorian collection and it was great.<br />
Rose: _____________ tell Emma about the museum. She is really into<br />
design.<br />
Donna: Emma is away on holiday now and the exhibition ends this week.<br />
Rose: _____________________________________________________<br />
12<br />
Listen to the recording and check your answers. Practise the complete<br />
conversation with a partner and then role play it in front of your classmates.<br />
door<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
185
186<br />
UNIT 6<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
Reported Speech<br />
1. Read these sentences from the text.<br />
a. Lawrence told us he was the personal decorator for the British Prime<br />
Ministers.<br />
b. He told us he would not put any curtains in the window.<br />
c. We asked Lawrence if his teenage sons were happy with the change.<br />
2. The sentences above are written in Reported Speech, which is used to<br />
express what others have said.<br />
a. Lawrence: ”I am the personal decorator for the British Prime Ministers.”<br />
b. Lawrence: “I will not put any curtains in the window.”<br />
c. Glenda: “Are your teenage sons happy with the change?”<br />
3. To introduce Reported Speech we use words such as asked, said, told,<br />
answered, etc.<br />
4. When changing sentences from Direct to Reported Speech tense<br />
changes take place. Some of these changes are:<br />
Present Past<br />
Present / Perfect / Past Past Perfect<br />
will would<br />
can could<br />
may might<br />
5. Analyse what happens when we are reporting questions.<br />
13<br />
Rewrite these sentences in your notebook using Reported Speech and<br />
the reporting verbs in brackets.<br />
a. Pat: “Are you happy?” (asked)<br />
b. Eddie: “I am going on holiday soon.” (said)<br />
c. Andy and Jill: “We will visit Kim when we are in New York.” (told us)<br />
d. Gabriel: “Can you swim well?” (asked)<br />
e. Tony: “I always wash my hands before eating.” (said)<br />
f. Sue: “My daughter sings beautifully.” (told me)<br />
14 Now change these sentences into Direct Speech.<br />
a. Rick told us he was working in the design industry.<br />
b. Paula and Kate asked if they could use our computer.<br />
c. Daniel said he would help us with our project.<br />
d. Molly said she checked her e-mails every day.<br />
e. Gregory said he was going to study computer sciences.<br />
f. Tania said she could go shopping with us.
FAST CHECK<br />
15 Rewrite this part of the interview on page 184 using Reported Speech.<br />
Use different reporting verbs and pay attention to the changes you will<br />
need to make. (10 points)<br />
Glenda: So, what can we see in this room?<br />
Lawrence: Well, this is our family room. It's a typical 5 x 4 metre<br />
rectangular room with basic beige and white colours where<br />
there is one good-sized window that overlooks the garden.<br />
Glenda: And what are we going to see today?<br />
Lawrence: When we've finished we'll have a charming place where my<br />
whole family can feel relaxed and wanting to spend quality<br />
time together.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
PLAY IT<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
Play Describe and Draw with your partner.<br />
a. Make a simple drawing of a room (it can<br />
be your bedroom).<br />
b. Ask your partner to take a piece of paper<br />
and turn around.<br />
c. Describe the positions of the furniture in<br />
the room for your partner to draw.<br />
d. After he or she finishes compare your<br />
picture with his or hers.<br />
e. Change roles.<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
16 Go back to the text and choose parts of it written in Reported Speech to<br />
add them to the interview in Direct Speech.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Reading<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
187
Mind<br />
188<br />
CHANGING LANGUAGE<br />
LISTENING<br />
UNIT 6<br />
T ea s er<br />
Do animals and humans<br />
communicate? Yes, they do<br />
and we can see it every day<br />
in our interactions with our<br />
pets. When an owner gets<br />
angry with her / his dog the<br />
pet does not necessarily<br />
understand every word but<br />
is able to understand the<br />
message by interpreting cues<br />
such as the owner's position,<br />
her / his tone of voice, and<br />
body language. In<br />
exchange, the owner knows<br />
that her / his dog is happy<br />
when it wags its tails or that it<br />
is hungry when it tries to<br />
open the bag where its food<br />
is kept.<br />
1<br />
2<br />
THINK AHEAD<br />
Match the words in the box with the definitions below (a. - c.).<br />
· linguist · native speaker · polyglot<br />
Lesson 4<br />
a. a person who speaks many languages.<br />
b. a person who studies a language or languages, mainly their form and<br />
behaviour.<br />
c. a speaker of a particular language who has spoken that language since<br />
he or she was a child.<br />
What languages do these young people speak? Look at the pictures<br />
(1 - 4) and then complete the sentences (a. - d.).<br />
1 2<br />
a. Josette is from Paris; she speaks<br />
_________________________.<br />
3 4<br />
a. Luigi is from Rome; he speaks<br />
_________________________.<br />
b. Natalia is from Moscow; she<br />
speaks ___________________.<br />
b. Ly-Sen is from Beijing; she<br />
speaks ___________________.
3<br />
Examine the words in the box.<br />
a. What do they have in common?<br />
b. Why are there two words in a different colour?<br />
c. Can you develop a definition of language from the words in this box?<br />
Write it in your notebook.<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
· acceptable · American · Australian · billion · Briton<br />
· communicating · completely · consonant · different<br />
· difficult · expect · express · human · information<br />
· language · lecture · linguist · million · minority · native<br />
· personal · plural · present · pronounce · question<br />
· respectively · sign · similar · singular · symbol<br />
· system · traditional · verb · version<br />
Considering the title of the lesson and the exercises you have done, what<br />
do you think the listening text will be about?<br />
a. How all languages change with time.<br />
b. What the changes in English will be like.<br />
c. Why languages change with time.<br />
GO AHEAD<br />
Listen to the recording and check your predictions in Exercises 3 and 4.<br />
Copy this chart into your notebook. Listen again and complete it with<br />
the changes linguists think will take place in English.<br />
Now<br />
“th” in this<br />
“th” in think<br />
Information<br />
Furniture<br />
He runs<br />
She walks<br />
Friend<br />
Send<br />
In the future<br />
Danger<br />
False cognates are pairs of<br />
words in different languages<br />
that are similar in form but<br />
have a different meaning,<br />
that is to say they appear to<br />
be or are sometimes<br />
considered cognates when in<br />
fact they are not. One<br />
example is the word lecture<br />
which looks similar to the<br />
word lectura in Spanish;<br />
however, a lecture is a<br />
presentation on a given<br />
subject delivered before an<br />
audience or a class, as for<br />
the purpose of instruction.<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
189
190<br />
UNIT 6<br />
7<br />
Listen to the lecture again and answer these questions.<br />
a. What are the two answers the audience give when the lecturer asks<br />
“What is language”?<br />
b. What will the name of the new language be?<br />
c. What does the word pan mean in Greek?<br />
d. Why will the changes in English take place?<br />
e. Can the lecturer say when the changes will take place?<br />
f. Can native speakers of English prevent the changes?<br />
8<br />
Listen once more and fill in each blank in these sentences with one<br />
word only.<br />
a. Is language _________ or not?<br />
b. We think that the language once used by great _________ such as<br />
Shakespeare, Dickens and, more recently, J.K. Rowling will look<br />
completely different.<br />
c. By 2012 around two billion people will speak English as a _________<br />
language.<br />
d. Linguists say the new language will lose some of the English sounds<br />
which non-native speakers find difficult to _________.<br />
MAKE CONNECTIONS<br />
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK<br />
The Simple Future<br />
1. Read these sentences from the listening text.<br />
a. The language will look completely different in a very short time.<br />
b. Will it happen fast?<br />
c. The change will not happen because of Britons.<br />
2. In the sentences above the Simple Future is expressing predictions.<br />
3. The Simple Future can also express that a speaker will do something<br />
voluntarily.<br />
I will bring some strawberry ice-cream.<br />
4. The Simple Future can also express a promise.<br />
I will help you when I finish my work.<br />
5. Notice the structure of the Simple Future and the examples.<br />
Affirmative/ Subject + will (not) + infinitive<br />
Negative: I + will (not) + speak.<br />
Interrogative: Will + subject + infinitive?<br />
Will + the change + happen soon?<br />
6. Very often in spoken English the subject and the word will are contracted.<br />
I'll talk to her tomorrow. We'll send them some flowers.<br />
That'll be all for now. Henry'll be here soon.
9<br />
You are asked to make predictions for the changes in Spanish in the future.<br />
Develop them using the Simple Future tense. Use these and your own ideas.<br />
a. favour short forms like in text messages<br />
b. incorporate more jargon<br />
c. incorporate words from English<br />
d. invent new words related to science and technology<br />
e. simplify orthography<br />
f. simplify verb tenses<br />
10 Write five sentences about what you think will be true about yourself in<br />
10 years' time. The photos can give you some ideas.<br />
Example: In 10 years' time I will be married.<br />
11 Can you decipher this electronic message? Write it in your notebook and<br />
check in your group.<br />
Sorry 4 not<br />
answering b4. Yes, I’d<br />
love to CU<br />
face2face. IC that U<br />
like chatting, too. B<br />
back tonite.<br />
CU soon<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
191
192<br />
a.<br />
The human<br />
race will<br />
establish a<br />
first space<br />
colony.<br />
UNIT 6<br />
12 Read the statements (a. - d.) and match them with the pictures (1 - 4).<br />
b.<br />
Many animals<br />
will become<br />
extinct.<br />
c.<br />
In five years'<br />
time we will find<br />
a cure for<br />
cancer.<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
HAVE A CHAT<br />
d.<br />
We will<br />
make our first<br />
contact with<br />
other<br />
civilisations.<br />
13 You are a fortune teller and a new client is asking you to make<br />
predictions about her / his future. Answer the questions using your<br />
imagination.<br />
Client: What will I study after I finish school?<br />
You: _____________________________________________________<br />
Client: Will I travel a lot in the future?<br />
You: _____________________________________________________<br />
Client: Will I meet some important people there?<br />
You: _____________________________________________________<br />
Client: Will I meet someone who will love me very much?<br />
You: _____________________________________________________<br />
Client: And how about my future job?<br />
You: _____________________________________________________<br />
Client: Do you think I will be rich?<br />
You: _____________________________________________________<br />
Client: Just one more question, will people in the future be immortal?<br />
You: _____________________________________________________<br />
14<br />
Listen to the recording and check your answers. Then listen and<br />
practice the conversation with a partner. Role play it in front of your<br />
classmates.
FAST CHECK<br />
15 Look at the pictures and make five predictions for the future.(10 points)<br />
1 2 3 4 5<br />
16 Write five predictions for Chile in 20 years' time.<br />
Example: Lots of people will move to the country.<br />
CHECK IT OVER! ✔<br />
Tick one box in each row according to your performance in this lesson.<br />
Listening<br />
Speaking<br />
Writing<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
WRITE IT DOWN<br />
PLAY IT<br />
0 - 5<br />
Review the lesson<br />
6 - 8<br />
Quite good<br />
9 - 10<br />
Excellent<br />
Play the What will be will be game in your group.<br />
a. Work in groups of six students.<br />
b. Prepare five cards each with possible future events in your lives.<br />
Example: have 10 children<br />
be a famous rock star<br />
work abroad<br />
c. Take turns to agree or disagree with what the card predicts.<br />
Example: Mm, yes, I think I will have 10 children.<br />
Mm, no, I won't be a famous rock star.<br />
d. Keep your YES cards on your right and your NO cards on your left.<br />
e. At the end of the game, write complete sentences with your<br />
predictions.<br />
I need more work I did OK I did really well!<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
193
1<br />
2<br />
194<br />
Look at the official results of an international sports competition that is taking place this week. Ask and<br />
answer the questions in your notebook.<br />
COUNTRY<br />
a. Which country has won the most gold medals?<br />
b. How many medals has Great Britain won in total?<br />
c. Which country has won more silver medals, than China?<br />
d. How many gold medals has Russia won?<br />
e. Has Chile won more or fewer bronze medals than Great Britain?<br />
f. Which country / countries have / has won 21 silver medals?<br />
Gregory and Peter, two office workers, have been stuck in a lift for the<br />
last 3 hours. Complete the conversation using the Simple Future tense.<br />
Gregory: _____________________________________?<br />
Peter: No, I don't think we will stay here the whole day.<br />
Gregory: _____________________________________?<br />
Peter: Yes, I think they will rescue us soon.<br />
Gregory: _____________________________________?<br />
Peter: I'm not sure they will call the fire brigade.<br />
Gregory: _____________________________________?<br />
Peter: No, I don't think our families will be waiting for us outside.<br />
Gregory: _____________________________________?<br />
Peter: Of course we will not be in the 9 o'clock news!<br />
UNIT 6<br />
USA<br />
GOLD<br />
36<br />
SILVER<br />
38<br />
BRONZE<br />
36<br />
TOTAL<br />
110<br />
China 51 21 28 100<br />
Russia 23 21 28 72<br />
Great<br />
Britain<br />
18 13 15 47<br />
Chile 15 10 20 45
3<br />
Look at the Fashion Museum program for the year 2010. What events will take place and when?<br />
4 Read the quotations below and report what some famous people said.<br />
Example:<br />
“I often think that the night is more alive and more richly coloured than the<br />
day”.<br />
Vincent van Gogh<br />
Vincent van Gogh said that he often thought that the night was more richly<br />
coloured than the day.<br />
The real question is not<br />
whether machines think<br />
but whether men do.<br />
B. F. Skinner<br />
THE FASHION MUSEUM<br />
PROGRAM 2010<br />
March Fashion in Ancient Egypt.<br />
April - May What our grandmothers wore.<br />
June Dresses from our history<br />
August - December Fashion in the early 20's<br />
September Not just a question of fashion<br />
November Accessories in Ancient Greece<br />
December Christmas Extravaganza<br />
Dance is the hidden<br />
language of the soul.<br />
Martha Graham<br />
If help and salvation are to<br />
come, they can only come<br />
from the children, for the<br />
children are the makers of<br />
men.<br />
Maria Montessori<br />
A man who is not afraid of<br />
the sea will soon be drowned.<br />
J. M. Synge<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
195
READING - ON THE FIRST DAY OF CHRISTMAS<br />
1<br />
196<br />
On the first day of Christmas,<br />
My true love sent to me<br />
A partridge in a pear tree.<br />
On the second day of Christmas,<br />
My true love sent to me<br />
Two turtle doves,<br />
And a partridge in a pear tree.<br />
On the third day of Christmas,<br />
My true love sent to me<br />
Three French hens,<br />
Two turtle doves,<br />
And a partridge in a pear tree.<br />
On the fourth day of Christmas,<br />
My true love sent to me<br />
Four calling birds,<br />
Three French hens,<br />
Two turtle doves,<br />
And a partridge in a pear tree.<br />
On the fifth day of Christmas,<br />
My true love sent to me<br />
Five golden rings,<br />
Four calling birds,<br />
Three French hens,<br />
Two turtle doves,<br />
And a partridge in a pear tree.<br />
Find the items in the pictures in the poem and write the correct number.<br />
a. ___ lords a-leaping b. ___ ladies dancing c. ___ calling birds d. ___ geese a-laying<br />
UNIT 6<br />
On the sixth day of Christmas,<br />
my true love sent to me<br />
Six geese a-laying,<br />
Five golden rings,<br />
Four calling birds,<br />
Three French hens,<br />
Two turtle doves,<br />
And a partridge in a pear tree.<br />
On the seventh day of Christmas,<br />
My true love sent to me<br />
Seven swans a-swimming,<br />
Six geese a-laying,<br />
Five golden rings,<br />
Four calling birds,<br />
Three French hens,<br />
Two turtle doves,<br />
And a partridge in a pear tree.<br />
On the eighth day of Christmas,<br />
my true love sent to me<br />
Eight maids a-milking,<br />
Seven swans a-swimming,<br />
Six geese a-laying,<br />
Five golden rings,<br />
Four calling birds,<br />
Three French hens,<br />
Two turtle doves,<br />
And a partridge in a pear tree.<br />
On the ninth day of Christmas,<br />
my true love sent to me<br />
Nine ladies dancing,<br />
Eight maids a-milking,<br />
Seven swans a-swimming,<br />
Six geese a-laying,<br />
Five golden rings,<br />
Four calling birds,<br />
Three French hens,<br />
Two turtle doves,<br />
And a partridge in a pear tree.<br />
On the tenth day of Christmas,<br />
my true love sent to me<br />
Ten lords a-leaping,<br />
Nine ladies dancing,<br />
Eight maids a-milking,<br />
Seven swans a-swimming,<br />
Six geese a-laying,<br />
Five golden rings,<br />
Four calling birds,<br />
Three French hens,<br />
Two turtle doves,<br />
And a partridge in a pear tree.<br />
4 pt.
2 Read the poem again and answer these questions.<br />
a. What did the singer receive on the first day of Christmas?<br />
b. How many French hens did she get?<br />
c. How many turtle doves did her true love send her?<br />
d. Did he send her five or six golden rings?<br />
e. Were the swans swimming or dancing?<br />
f. What were the maids doing?<br />
LISTENING - THE RIGHT CLOTHES<br />
3 Listen to the conversation and identify which clothes you would take to the south of<br />
Chile and which clothes you ought to take if you go to Easter Island.<br />
4<br />
Tick the corresponding column.<br />
LANGUAGE<br />
5<br />
· boots · shorts · sneakers · sweater<br />
· swimming suit · trousers · T-shirt · umbrella<br />
Which ethnic group wears<br />
a type of belt called tralihue?<br />
beautiful headgear?<br />
clothes made of colourful and vibrant feathers?<br />
lots of silver jewellery?<br />
nice white and flowery blouses?<br />
Mapuche Rapa Nui<br />
Write questions and answers in the Present Perfect tense using the clues provided and the<br />
words in the box.<br />
· ever · for · just · never · recently · since<br />
a. know Greta? Seven years.<br />
b. have this car? Brand new!<br />
c. see such a beautiful thing in your life? First time<br />
d. Work with Peter?2008<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
6 pts.<br />
8 pts.<br />
5 pts.<br />
8 pts.<br />
197
198<br />
6 Make predictions for the future using the Simple Future.<br />
a. people / travel by spaceship<br />
b. people / work fewer hours<br />
c. people / live on other planets<br />
d. cars / use solar energy<br />
4 pts.<br />
7 Choose the best option<br />
a. What will you do next year?<br />
i. i. I think I will work ii. Nothing, I finished already.<br />
b. Where will you go on holiday?<br />
i. I will not have any days off. ii. I have been to Berlin.<br />
c. Will you call the police or shall I?<br />
i. I have already called them. ii. I am speaking to him.<br />
d. Will you go to the party tomorrow?<br />
i. No, I won’t. ii. Yes, she will.<br />
9 Rewrite these sentences using Reported Speech.<br />
a. Pearl: “I can speak French and German”.<br />
b. Jenny: “Do you want to go to the cinema with me?”<br />
c. Susan: “What is she saying?”<br />
d. The boys: “We will play in the park.”<br />
SPEAKING<br />
10 Express surprise, interest, sympathy or joy. Use one of the expressions in the bubbles.<br />
a.<br />
How wonderful!<br />
i. I am feeling really bad. I think I’m getting a bad cold.<br />
ii. Mum, I have passed my final exam!<br />
iii. Did you know that the Pacific is the biggest ocean in the world?<br />
iv. It says here that there are two million words in the English language.<br />
UNIT 6<br />
b.<br />
How interesting!<br />
c.<br />
What a pity!<br />
d.<br />
Wow, it’s really<br />
surprising.<br />
4 pts.<br />
4 pts.<br />
8 pts.
WRITING<br />
11 Look at the pictures and describe the clothes the people are wearing.<br />
8 pts.<br />
Your<br />
result:<br />
0 - 22<br />
Not too good<br />
FINAL CHECK ✔ ✔<br />
Choose one alternative according to your performance.<br />
Speaking<br />
· I use English structures correctly.<br />
· I use varied and correct vocabulary.<br />
· Others can understand me.<br />
Writing<br />
· My writing is coherent and follows the central idea.<br />
· I use the correct sentence formation and sentence structure<br />
· I use the correct spelling, punctuation, capitalisation and format.<br />
Reading<br />
· I am aware of the differences in tenses, gender and number.<br />
· I identify the main idea and understand the text as a whole.<br />
· I can locate details and look for specific information.<br />
Listening<br />
· I can get the general idea.<br />
· I can understand the details and identify speakers.<br />
· I can identify the source of a listening text and recognise the format<br />
Group work<br />
· I share my ideas with the group<br />
· I listen to and respect my partners’ points of view<br />
· I help solve problems and contribute with relevant information<br />
23 - 44<br />
Acceptable<br />
Always<br />
Most of the time<br />
Sometimes<br />
Never<br />
45 - 59<br />
Great!<br />
Total<br />
59 pts.<br />
Use this clue to work out your score<br />
Never = 0<br />
Sometimes = 1<br />
Most of the time = 2<br />
Always = 3<br />
If you get:<br />
0 - 10 = Watch out! You must look back<br />
and review the whole unit. Ask your<br />
teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
11 - 22 = Not too bad, but there are<br />
areas you still have problems with.<br />
Identify those areas and ask your<br />
teacher and / or a classmate for<br />
additional help and remedial work.<br />
23 - 34 = You are doing fine, but you<br />
can certainly do better. Get together<br />
with a classmate and review your weak<br />
points.<br />
35 - 45 = Congratulations! Great<br />
progress - you may look ahead to the<br />
new unit and help your classmates who<br />
need to review.<br />
TRADITIONS, TRADITIONS<br />
199
BIBLIOGRAPHY<br />
BOOKS<br />
• ESCOTT. J.H.; 2008. HANNAH AND THE<br />
HURRICANE. Penguin Readers, BK/CD. England,<br />
Pearson Education Limited.<br />
• RABLEY, S.T.; 2008. BETWEEN TWO WORLDS.<br />
Penguin Readers, BK/CD. England, Pearson<br />
Education Limited.<br />
• RABLEY, S.T.; 2008. BILLY AND THE QUEEN.<br />
Penguin Readers, BK/CD. England, Pearson<br />
Education Limited.<br />
• RABLEY, S.T.; 2008. DINO’S DAY IN LONDON.<br />
Penguin Readers, BK/CD. England, Pearson<br />
Education Limited.<br />
• RABLEY, S.T.; 2008. THE FIRE BOY. Penguin Readers,<br />
BK/CD. England, Pearson Education Limited.<br />
• RABLEY, S.T.; 2008. FLYING HOME. Penguin<br />
Readers, BK/CD. England, Pearson Education<br />
Limited.<br />
• RABLEY. S.T.; 2008. THE PEARL GIRL. Penguin<br />
Readers, Bk/CD. England, Pearson Education<br />
Limited.<br />
• SMITH, R.D.; 2008. TOM CRUISE. Penguin Readers,<br />
Bk/CD. England, Pearson Education Limited.<br />
• SMITH. B.D.; 2008. THE LAST PHOTO. Penguin<br />
Readers, BK/CD. England, Pearson Education<br />
Limited.<br />
• SMITH. B.D.; 2003. DAVID BECKHAM. Penguin<br />
Readers, BK/CD. England, Pearson Education<br />
Limited.<br />
• SMITH, R.D.; 2008. TOM CRUISE. Penguin Readers,<br />
Bk/CD. England, Pearson Education Limited.<br />
DICTIONARIES<br />
• HAMEL, B.D.; 1998. DICTIONARY OF ENGLISH<br />
SPANISH COGNATE WORDS; 1st Edition. USA,<br />
Bilingual Book Press.<br />
• MASCULL, B.L.; 1997. COLLINS COBUILD KEY<br />
WORDS IN SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY; 1st<br />
Edition. England, Heinemann Publishers.<br />
• MURPHY, R.M.; 1997. ESSENTIAL GRAMMAR IN<br />
USE; 2nd Ed. Great Britain, Cambridge University<br />
Press.<br />
200<br />
READING<br />
• ATWELL. N.C;. et al.; 1998. IN THE MIDDLE: NEW<br />
UNDERSTANDING ABOUT WRITING, READING,<br />
AND LEARNING (WORKSHOP SERIES) s.e. s.l.,<br />
Heinemann.<br />
• BURKE. J.M;. et al.; 2003. READING REMINDERS:<br />
TOOLS, TIPS, AND TECHNIQUES, s.e.s.l.<br />
• PEREGOY. S.F;. et al.; 2005. READING, WRITING AND<br />
LEARNING IN ESL 3rd Ed. England, Allyn & Bacon,<br />
Pearson.<br />
LISTENING<br />
• PENNY, U.R. et al; 1991. TEACHING LISTENING<br />
COMPREHENSION, Cambridge Handbooks for<br />
Language Teachers; s.e. s.l,<br />
• PORTER, G.L. et al; 1991. ROLE PLAY- Resource<br />
Books for Teachers; s.e ,s.l.<br />
• RICHARDS, J.K. et al; 1997. DEVELOPING TACTICS<br />
FOR LISTENING; 1st Edition. England, Oxford<br />
University Press.<br />
SPEAKING<br />
• HADFIELD, J.L.; 1992. CLASSROOM DYNAMICS; 4th<br />
Ed. England, Oxford University Press.<br />
• PALIM, J.V. et al; 1992 TOMBOLA, Communication<br />
Activities for Teenagers; 3rd Ed. England, Addison<br />
Wesley Longman.<br />
GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY<br />
• REDMAN, S. et al; 1996 A WAY WITH WORDS; 1st<br />
Edition. Great Britain, Cambridge University Press.<br />
• RINVOLUCRI, M. et al; 1995 MORE GRAMMAR<br />
GAMES; 1st Edition. Great Britain, Cambridge<br />
University Press.<br />
WRITING<br />
• MILLÁN, N. et al; 1996 ON THE <strong>JO</strong>B; 1st Edition.<br />
España, Mcgraw-Hill Interamericana.<br />
• PENNY, U.R; 1996. A COURSE IN LANGUAGE<br />
TEACHING; 1st Edition. Great Britain, Cambridge<br />
University Press.<br />
• RICHARDS, J.K et al; 1998. ESTRATEGIAS DE<br />
REFLEXION SOBRE LA ENSEÑANZA DE IDIOMAS;<br />
1st Edition. España, Cambridge University Press.
EDICIÓN ESPECIAL PARA EL MINISTERIO DE EDUCACIÓN - PROHIBIDA SU COMERCIALIZACIÓN AÑO 2011